Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference. Canadian Vehicle Owners ... can use to manually turn on or off the right front passenger airbag.
GMC Savana Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (4,1) iv Introduction Using this Manual To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found. Danger, Warnings, and Cautions Warning messages found on vehicle
2012 GMC Savana Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-40
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-23 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-33 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
2012 GMC Savana Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 Special Application Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Additional Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 OnStar Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Introduction iii
The names, logos, emblems, slogans, vehicle model names, and vehicle body designs appearing in this manual including, but not limited to, GM, the GM logo, GMC, the GMC Truck Emblem, and SAVANA are trademarks and/or service marks of General Motors LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.
This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle either because they are options that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name "General Motors of Canada Limited" for GMC wherever it appears in this manual.
If the vehicle has the Duramax® Diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for additional and specific information on this engine.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Canadian Vehicle Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123 Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 20875605 A First Printing
©2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found.
Danger, Warnings, and Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death.
{ WARNING
These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people.
Notice: This means there is something that could result in property or vehicle damage. This would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means "Do Not," "Do not do this," or "Do not let this happen."
Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gauge, or indicator.
M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see the owner manual for additional instructions or information.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or information.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. For more information on the symbol, refer to the Index.
9 : Airbag Readiness Light # : Air Conditioning ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) % : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar®
J : Brake System Warning
Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control B : Engine Coolant Temperature O : Exterior Lamps . : Fuel Gauge + : Fuses 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
i : Top Tether Anchors for Child
Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : : Oil Pressure } : Power
Introduction v
/ : Remote Vehicle Start > : Safety Belt Reminders 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor _ : Tow/Haul Mode d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak® M : Windshield Washer Fluid
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief
Instrument Panel Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-8 Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Vehicle Features Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-15 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Performance and Maintenance StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-19 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-19 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-19 Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 87.
B. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 527.
C. Turn and Lane-Change Lever. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 64.
Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 54.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 64 (Out of View).
E. Instrument Cluster on page 511.
F. Shift Lever. See Starting the Engine on page 917.
Manual Mode on page 929 (If Equipped).
G. Climate Control Systems on page 81.
H. Infotainment on page 71.
I. Exterior Lamp Controls on page 61.
J. Instrument Panel Illumination Control on page 65.
Dome Lamp Override. See Dome Lamps on page 65.
K. Cruise Control on page 935 (If Equipped).
Fast Idle System (If Equipped). See the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 52 (If Equipped).
M. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out of View). See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 520.
N. Horn on page 53.
O. Steering Wheel Controls on page 52 (If Equipped).
P. Tow/Haul Mode Button. See "Tow/Haul Mode" under Towing Equipment on page 952.
Q. Power Outlets on page 58.
R. StabiliTrak® System on page 933 (If Equipped).
S. Passenger Airbag On-Off Switch (If Equipped). See Airbag On-Off Switch on page 324.
T. Front Storage on page 41 (If Equipped).
U. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 519 (If Equipped).
OnStar® System Button (If Equipped). See OnStar Overview on page 141.
V. Rear Heating System on page 84 (If Equipped).
W. USB Port (If Equipped). See Auxiliary Devices on page 717.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive Information
This section provides a brief overview about some of the important features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
If equipped, the RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
RKE Transmitter with Remote Start Shown
Q : Press to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized. See Vehicle Personalization on page 540.
K : Press to unlock the driver door. Press K again within five seconds
to unlock all remaining doors.
j : Press to unlock only the cargo
doors.
L : Press and release to locate the vehicle. Press L and hold for
more than two seconds to sound the
panic alarm. Press L again to
cancel the panic alarm.
See Keys on page 22 and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 23.
Remote Vehicle Start
With this feature the engine can be started from outside of the vehicle.
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release Q.
3. Immediately after completing
Step 2, press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running. The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start can be extended only once.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start:
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
until the parking lamps turn off.
. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
. Turn the ignition on and then back off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 25.
In Brief 1-5
Door Locks
Manual Door Locks
Lock and unlock the door from the outside using the key or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if available. From the inside, slide the manual lever on the door up or down. See Door Locks on page 26.
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are located on the doors.
T : Press to lock and unlock the
doors.
See Power Door Locks on page 27.
Windows
Manual Windows
Operate the manual windows by turning the hand crank on each door to raise or lower the side door windows.
See Manual Windows on page 215.
1-6 In Brief
Power Windows
If the vehicle has power windows, the controls are located on each of the side doors. The driver door also has a control to operate the front passenger window. Press or pull up on the switch to lower or raise the window.
Express-Down
The driver window switch also has an express-down feature that allows the window to be lowered without holding the switch. Press fully and release the window switch marked AUTO to activate the express-down mode. This mode can be cancelled at any time by pulling up on the switch. To open the window part way, lightly tap the switch until the window is at the desired position.
See Power Windows on page 216.
Seat Adjustment
Manual Seats
To adjust a manual seat:
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure the seat is locked in place.
See Seat Adjustment on page 32.
Power Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
In Brief 1-7
To return the seatback to the upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback will return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 33.
To adjust a power seat, if available, use the controls on the front of the seat:
. Adjust the seat by moving the center knob up, down, right, or left.
. Raise and lower the front or rear of the seat cushion by moving the right or left lever up or down.
See Power Seat Adjustment on page 33.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever on the inboard side of the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, and then release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
1-8 In Brief Safety Belts
Airbag On-Off Switch
If the instrument panel has one of the switches pictured in the following illustrations, the vehicle has an airbag on-off switch that you can use to manually turn on or off the right front passenger airbag.
Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use safety belts properly.
. Safety Belts on page 38.
. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 310.
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 311.
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 343.
United States
Canada and Mexico
To operate the airbag on-off switch, use the vehicle key.
See Airbag On-Off Switch on page 324 for important information.
Passenger Sensing System
The passenger sensing system, if equipped, will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbag and roof-rail airbags, if equipped, are not affected by this.
In Brief 1-9
If the vehicle has a passenger sensing system, the passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
Vehicles with outside manual mirrors can be adjusted by moving the mirror up and down or left to right so you can see a little of the side of the vehicle, and have a clear view of objects behind you.
Select each mirror by turning the knob clockwise for the passenger side mirror or counterclockwise for the driver side mirror. Adjust the mirror angle by moving the knob in the desired direction.
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not adjusting either outside mirror.
United States
Canada and Mexico
See Passenger Sensing System on page 328 for important information.
Vehicles with outside power mirrors have controls located on the driver side door.
Vehicles with towing mirrors can be adjusted manually for a clear view of the objects behind you.
1-10 In Brief
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return it to the original position.
Interior Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view behind the vehicle. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind. Push the tab, located at the base of the mirror, forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on page 215.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Interior Lighting
Dome Lamp
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened. They turn off after all the doors are closed.
For vehicles with a tilt steering wheel, the lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever to move the steering wheel up or down into a comfortable position.
2. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in place.
See Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 52.
The instrument panel brightness
knob extends when D is pressed.
To manually turn on the dome
lamps, press D then turn the knob
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
In Brief 1-11
E DOME OFF: This button is
located above the instrument panel brightness knob.
Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the button again so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
Reading Lamps
For vehicles with reading lamps, press the button located next to each lamp to turn it on or off.
The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
For more information on interior lighting, see:
. Instrument Panel Illumination Control on page 65.
. Entry/Exit Lighting on page 66.
Exterior Lighting
The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
O : Briefly turn the control to this
position to turn the automatic headlamps and Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) off or back on. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position only works for vehicles that are shifted into the P (Park) position.
AUTO: Automatically turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, and license plate lamps.
; : Turns on the parking lamps,
taillamps, instrument panel lights, and license plate lamps.
2 : Turns on the headlamps,
parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, and license plate lamps.
For more information, see:
. Exterior Lamp Controls on page 61.
. Exterior Lamps Off Reminder on page 62.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 63.
. Automatic Headlamp System on page 63.
1-12 In Brief
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Climate Controls
The vehicle's heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled with these systems.
The lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
8 : Use for a single wiping cycle. 6 : Use to adjust the delay time
between wipes. Turn the band up or down for more frequent wipes or less frequent wipes.
d : Slow wipes. a : Fast wipes. 9 : Use to turn the wipers off. L : Push the paddle on top of the
multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the windshield.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 54.
Vehicles without Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control B. Temperature Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control
Vehicles with Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
D. Rear Window Defogger
See Climate Control Systems on page 81. See Rear Heating System on page 84 (If Equipped) or Rear Climate Control System on page 85 (If Equipped).
Transmission
Range Selection Mode
The vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode. The Range Selection Mode helps control the
In Brief 1-13
vehicle's transmission and vehicle speed while driving downhill or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range of gears.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever to M (Manual Mode).
2. Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the steering column shift lever, to select the desired range of gears for current driving conditions.
When M (Manual Mode) is selected, a number displays in the DIC next to the M indicating the current gear.
Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 930.
While using Range Selection Mode, Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul Mode can be used. See Manual Mode on page 929.
1-14 In Brief
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
Radio with CD (MP3)
O : Press to turn the system on
and off. Turn to increase or
decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to choose between FM1, FM2, AM, and XMTM.
f : Select radio stations.
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Seek or scan
stations.
4 : Press to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. While the ignition is off, press this button to display the time. Press to display additional text information related to the current FM-RDS station or MP3 song. A choice of additional information such as Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) can display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab, or press the softkey located under any one of the tabs and the information about that tab displays.
For more information about these and other radio features, see Infotainment on page 71.
Storing a Favorite Station
Depending on which radio the vehicle has, radio stations are stored as either favorites or presets.
In Brief 1-15
For vehicles with a FAV button, a maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM and FM stations.
If the radio does not have a FAV button, up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on the six numbered buttons.
For more information on storing a favorite station, see Operation on page 73.
Setting the Clock
To set the time and date for the Radio with CD (MP3):
1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,
DD, and YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) display.
2. Press the softkey located below any one of the tabs that you want to change.
3. Increase or decrease the time or date, depending on the radio, by
pressing the © SEEK or ¨ SEEK buttons, s REV or \ FWD buttons, or by turning f
clockwise or counterclockwise.
For detailed instructions on setting the clock for your specific audio system, see Clock on page 56.
Satellite Radio
XM is a satellite radio service based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free music, coast to coast, and in digital-quality sound.
A fee is required to receive the XM service.
For more information, refer to:
. www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
. www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
See Satellite Radio on page 79.
Portable Audio Devices
This vehicle may have an auxiliary input located on the radio faceplate and a USB port located on the instrument panel. External devices such as an iPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or USB storage device can be connected to the auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input cable or the USB port depending on the audio system.
See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack" and "Using the USB Port" in Auxiliary Devices on page 717.
1-16 In Brief
Bluetooth®
For vehicles with a Bluetooth system, it allows users with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle's audio system and controls.
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must be paired with the Bluetooth system before it can be used in the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions. For more information, visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
For more information, see Bluetooth on page 722.
Steering Wheel Controls
For vehicles with audio steering wheel controls, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.
w : Press to go to the next favorite
radio station, track on a CD, or folder on an iPod® or USB device.
c / x : Press to go to the
previous favorite radio station, track on a CD, or folder on an iPod® or USB device. Also press to reject an incoming call, or end a current call.
b / g : Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer than two seconds to interact with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems, if equipped.
+ e : Press to increase volume.
- e : Press to decrease volume.
SRCE: Press to switch between the radio and CD, and for equipped vehicles, the front auxiliary.
¨ : Press to seek the next radio
station, the next track while sourced to the CD, or to select tracks and folders on an iPod® or USB device.
For more information, see Steering Wheel Controls on page 52.
In Brief 1-17
Cruise Control
+RES: Press briefly to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed, or press and hold to accelerate.
SET-: Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or press and hold to decelerate.
[ : Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set speed from memory.
For more information, see Cruise Control on page 935.
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cell phone or an MP3 player.
The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets located on the instrument panel.
Remove the cover to access and replace when not in use.
See Power Outlets on page 58.
For vehicles with cruise control, the buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel.
J : Turns the system on or off.
1-18 In Brief
Performance and Maintenance
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle may have a traction control system that limits wheel spin and the StabiliTrak system that assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. Both systems turn on automatically every time the vehicle is started.
. To turn off traction control, press and release the StabiliTrak
button g. The appropriate DIC
message will display. See Ride Control System Messages on page 537.
. To turn off both traction control and StabiliTrak, press and hold
the StabiliTrak button g until the StabiliTrak Off light Y
illuminates and the appropriate DIC messages display. See Ride Control System Messages on page 537.
. Press and release the StabiliTrak button again to turn on both systems.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System on page 933.
In Brief 1-19
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS warning light alerts you to a significant loss in pressure of one of the vehicle's tires. If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910. The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is corrected.
During cooler conditions, the low tire pressure warning light may appear when the vehicle is first started and then turn off. This may be an early indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
The TPMS does not replace normal monthly tire maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 1055.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life based on vehicle use and displays a DIC message when it is necessary to change the engine oil and filter. The oil life system should be reset to 100% only following an oil change.
Resetting the Oil Life System
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 109.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge and a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 940. For all other vehicles, use only the unleaded gasoline described under Recommended Fuel on page 938.
1-20 In Brief
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
. Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
. Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
. When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control.
. Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require.
. Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
. Combine several trips into a single trip.
. Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near the size.
. Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
Roadside Assistance Program
U.S.: 1-888-881-3302
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new GMC, you are automatically enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 136 for more information.
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
If you have an active OnStar
subscription, press the Q button
and the current GPS location will be sent to an OnStar advisor who will assess your problem, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay your exact location to get the help you need.
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service that includes online service reminders, vehicle maintenance tips, online owner manual, special privileges, and more.
Sign up today at: www.gmcownercenter.com (U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
OnStar®
If equipped, this vehicle has a comprehensive, in-vehicle system that can connect to a live Advisor for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Connection, and Diagnostic Services. See OnStar Overview on page 141 for more information.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . 2-7 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Doors Side Door (60/40 Swing-Out) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Vehicle Security Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . 2-11
Exterior Mirrors Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Interior Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-15
Windows Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Swing-Out Windows . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Enhanced Technology Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks
Keys
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. Children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
The key is used for the ignition and all door locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
See your dealer if a replacement key or additional key is needed.
Notice: If the keys get locked in the vehicle, it may have to be damaged to get them out. Always carry a spare key.
If you are locked out of the vehicle, call the Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 136.
With an active OnStar subscription, an OnStar Advisor may remotely unlock the vehicle. See OnStar Overview on page 141.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 1316 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range:
. Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle.
. Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3
. Check the transmitter's battery. See "Battery Replacement" later in this section.
. If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
If equipped, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions work up to 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System on page 22.
RKE Transmitter with Remote Start Shown
Q (Lock): Press once to lock all
doors. If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred.
The horn may chirp when Q is
pressed again within five seconds. See Vehicle Personalization on page 540 for additional information.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver door. If K is pressed again
within five seconds, all remaining doors unlock.
The interior lamps come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle Personalization on page 540 for additional information.
j (Cargo Door): Press to unlock
only the cargo doors.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this feature, press Q and then press and hold / within
five seconds to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 25 for additional information.
2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and release to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds three times.
Press and hold L for more than
two seconds to activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to
ON/RUN or L is pressed again.
The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter is programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters programmed to it.
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See "REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY" under Key and Lock Messages on page 536 for additional information.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from your body could damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object, such as a flat head screwdriver.
. Carefully insert the tool into the notch located along the parting line of the transmitter. Do not insert the tool too far. Stop as soon as resistance is felt.
. Twist the tool until the transmitter is separated.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down. Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
Remote Vehicle Start
This vehicle may have a remote start feature. This feature allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle. It may also start the vehicle's heating or air conditioning systems. See Climate Control Systems on page 81 for additional information.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws may require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so. Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if the vehicle is low on fuel. The vehicle may run out of fuel.
If the vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE transmitter functions will have an increased range of operation. However, the range may be less while the vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System on page 22 for additional information.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
This button will be on the RKE transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the engine using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release Q on the
transmitter.
3. Immediately press and hold /
until the turn signal lamps flash. If you cannot see the vehicle's lamps, press and hold for four seconds.
When the engine starts, the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the engine is running. The doors will be locked. The airbag readiness light will be on during a remote start. It should turn off when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 517 for more information.
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start can be extended only once.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
The maximum number of remote starts between ignition cycles with the key is two.
If the remote start procedure is used again before the first 10 minute time frame has ended, the first 10 minutes will immediately expire and the second 10 minute time frame will start.
2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows
After the engine has been remote started two times, the ignition switch must be turned to ON/RUN and then back to LOCK/OFF using the key before the remote start procedure can be used again.
To cancel a remote start:
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press / until the
parking lamps turn off.
. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
. Turn the ignition on and then back off.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:
. The key is in the ignition.
. The hood is open.
. The hazard warning flashers are on.
. There is an emission control system malfunction. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 520.
. The engine coolant temperature is too high.
. The oil pressure is low.
. Two remote vehicle starts have already been provided.
Door Locks
{ WARNING
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
. Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
. Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it.
. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop the vehicle. Locking the doors can help prevent this from happening.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7
To lock the door from the inside, slide the manual lever on the door down. To unlock the door, slide the manual lever up.
From the outside, use the key.
If the vehicle is equipped with keyless entry, see Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 23.
Power Door Locks
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are located on the doors.
T : Press to lock and unlock the
doors.
When a door is locked, the inside door handle will not work.
Cargo Door Relocking
If the cargo door is open when the lock button is pressed on the door or the RKE transmitter, all doors will lock except the cargo door. The cargo door will lock when it is closed or when the delayed locking feature functions.
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch and a door open, the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use.
Pressing e twice or Q on the RKE
transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
This feature can be programmed using the Driver Information Center (DIC). See "Delay Door Lock" in Vehicle Personalization on page 540.
Automatic Door Locks
The vehicle may have an automatic lock/unlock feature. This feature can be programmed using the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Vehicle Personalization on page 540 for more information on DIC programming.
2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when either the driver, passenger, or rear door is open, all the doors will lock and then the driver door will unlock. This feature does not include the side cargo door.
If the vehicle has an ambulance package, this feature is disabled.
Safety Locks
Security locks are located on the front portion of the 60/40 side swing-out door or the side sliding door.
60/40 Swing-Out Side Door -- Driver Side Shown,
Passenger Side Similar
For the 60/40 side swing-out door, move the button to the right for the driver side door or to the left for the passenger side door to engage the security feature.
Move the button to the left for the driver side door or to the right for the passenger side door to return the door locks to normal operation.
Side Sliding Door
For the side sliding door, move the button up to engage the security feature. Move the button down to return the door locks to normal operation.
Doors
Side Door (60/40 Swing-Out)
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9
To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the inside, pull the handle toward you and push the door open.
To open the front portion of a 60/40 door from the outside, pull out on the handle and open the door.
To open the rear portion of a 60/40 door from the outside, pull the handle on the side of the rear door and pull the door toward you.
To close the 60/40 side doors, close the rear door first. Then close the front door. Check to make sure that both doors are completely closed.
The swing-out doors have a check strap assembly in the door frame to keep the door from opening beyond 90 degrees.
2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows
To open the door beyond 90 degrees, close the door partially, pull the check strap toward you and then open the door. When the door is closed, the check strap will automatically re-engage.
Sliding Door
To close the sliding side door from the outside, use the handle to slide the door toward the front of the vehicle.
When the door is closed, it will be flush with the side of the body.
To open the sliding side door from the outside, pull the handle toward the rear of the vehicle and slide the door open.
To open the sliding side door from the inside, pull the handle toward the rear of the vehicle. Then, slide the door toward the rear of the vehicle.
To close the sliding side door from the inside, grasp the handle and slide the door toward the front of the vehicle.
Make sure the door is completely closed before driving away.
Rear Doors
{ WARNING
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
. Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the
(Continued)
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11
WARNING (Continued)
doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
. Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it.
. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop the vehicle. Locking the doors can help prevent this from happening.
To open the rear doors from the outside, pull the handle toward you to open the passenger side rear door first.
To open the driver side rear door, pull the latch release at the inside edge of the door.
To close the rear doors, close the driver side rear door first. Then close the passenger side rear door. Check to make sure both doors are completely closed.
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features; however, they do not make it impossible to steal.
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 1316 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle is equipped with the PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key III+ is a passive theft deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows
The security light will come on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key III+ system senses that someone is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle's starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes.
If the engine does not start and the security message comes on, the key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the instrument panel PASS KEY fuse.
If the engine still does not start with the other key, the vehicle needs service. If the vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key III+ to have a new key made. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 1040.
It is possible for the PASS-Key III+ decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. This procedure is for learning additional keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key III+ to have keys made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key III+ to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
To program the new key:
1. Verify the new key
has 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed key into the ignition lock cylinder and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to LOCK/OFF and remove the key.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON/RUN within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
The security message will turn off once the key has been programmed. It may not be apparent that the security message went on due to how quickly the key is programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key III+ key, see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
{ WARNING
A convex mirror can make things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat.
Manual Mirrors
Adjust the mirrors by pressing the mirror up and down and left and right.
The mirrors can be manually folded in or out.
On the lower portion of each mirror is an auxiliary convex mirror. A convex mirror's surface is curved so you can see more from the driver seat. The auxiliary convex mirrors can be adjusted manually by pressing the mirror.
2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Trailer-Tow Mirrors
Vehicles with towing mirrors can be adjusted manually for a clear view of the objects behind you. On the lower portion of each mirror there is an auxiliary convex mirror that can be adjusted manually to provide an extended field of view. The mirrors can be manually folded in or out.
Power Mirrors
Vehicles with outside power mirrors have controls located on the driver side door. Select each mirror by turning the knob clockwise for the passenger side mirror or counterclockwise for the driver side mirror. The center position is neutral.
Then, adjust the mirror angle by moving the knob in the desired direction. The auxiliary convex mirrors can only be adjusted manually.
Heated Mirrors
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
1 (Rear Defogger): Press to heat
the mirrors.
An indicator light in the button lights when the outside heated mirrors are activated.
See "Rear Window Defogger" under Climate Control Systems on page 81 for more information.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view behind the vehicle. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind. Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
If you have a cargo van without the rear door glass, the vehicle may not have an inside rearview mirror.
Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual Windows
Operate the manual windows by turning the hand crank on each door to raise or lower the side door windows.
2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Power Windows
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons. Children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows.
If the vehicle has power windows, the controls are located on each of the side doors.
The driver door has a switch for the passenger window also. The power windows will work when the ignition has been turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 919.
Press the switch to lower the window.
Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window.
Express-Down
The driver window switch also has an express-down feature that allows the window to be lowered without holding the switch. Press fully and release the window switch marked AUTO to activate the express-down mode. This mode can be cancelled at any time by pulling up on the switch. To open the window part way, lightly tap the switch until the window is at the desired position.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17
Swing-Out Windows
Side Swing-Out Window To open the side door swing-out window, pull up on the latch at the edge of the window. Swing the window out and push down on the latch to lock the window into place. To close the window, pull the latch toward you and push down on the latch to lock it.
Rear Swing-Out Windows
The vehicle also has rear swing-out windows. The rear swing-out windows work the same way as the side swing-out window, but the latch is located at the bottom edge of the window.
Enhanced Technology Glass
The vehicle may be equipped with Enhanced Technology Glass (ETG). ETG is part of the overall occupant protection system on passenger vans. ETG may help to keep passengers sitting next to these fixed windows from being ejected through the glass in some, but not in all crashes. Even with this glass, safety belts must still be worn at all times. For passenger vans, use only ETG glass approved for the vehicle for replacement when damaged.
2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows
The following table shows laminated glass location, based on vehicle model and options.
Vehicle Configuration
ETG Locations
Eight-Seat Passenger Vans
Sliding door forward window
12- and 15-Seat Passenger Vans
Sliding door forward window and rear-most side windows
Long Wheelbase Cargo Vans
Rear-most side windows
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors. You can also swing them to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
The vehicle may have visor vanity mirrors, with or without lamps. Lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on, if equipped.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Seats Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Safety Belts Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-16 Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Airbag System Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-19 When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-24 Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-33 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-34 Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Child Restraints Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-39 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-41 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-49 Securing Child Restraints (Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-49 Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat-Passenger Sensing System) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
On vehicles with factory installed seats, the front seats have built-in head restraints that are not adjustable in the outboard seating positions.
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
To adjust the seat:
1. Lift the bar under the front edge of the seat cushion to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure the seat is locked in place.
Seats and Restraints 3-3
Power Seat Adjustment
To adjust a power seat, if available, use the controls on the front of the seat: . Move the center knob to the
right or left to move the seat forward or rearward. . Move the center knob up or down to raise or lower the seat. . Move the right or left lever up or down to raise or lower the front or rear of the seat cushion.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the lever on the inboard side of the seat.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, and then release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
3-4 Seats and Restraints
To return the seatback to the upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback will return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash, the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.
Rear Seats
Removing the Rear Seat
Disconnect the mini-latch plates for the lap-shoulder belts on the bench seat to be removed.
Seats and Restraints 3-5
Three-Passenger Seat Shown The left side pin has a gray cap with a black "L" marked on it.
1. To do this, press the tip of a key into the release hole of the safety belt buckle while pulling up on the safety belt.
2. Locate the pins. On a three-passenger seat there are two pins on the inboard sides of the rear seats.
Three-Passenger Seat Shown
The right side pin has a black cap with a white "R" marked on it.
On a four-passenger seat, each half of the seat has a set of pins. The left side has a set marked "L," and the right side has a set marked "R".
If the vehicle has floor mats, the pins are under a flap that has been cut into the mat.
3-6 Seats and Restraints
3. Pull the pin handle up to disengage the pin from the retaining clip, and then pull the pin out.
4. Repeat this procedure for the other pins.
5. Pull the seat rearward about 5 cm (2 in), and then lift the seat from the floor rails.
6. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
7. For the second- and third-row seats, stow the safety belt latch by attaching the clip on the safety belt latch to the trim just inside the side door.
For the last row of seats, stow the safety belt latch plate on the clip at the window trim. Roll the mini-latch into the safety belt webbing and then hook the safety belt latch plate on the clip.
Seats and Restraints 3-7
Reinstalling the Rear Seats
{ WARNING
A seat that is not locked into place properly can move around in a collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into place properly when installing it.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1. Position the seat into the open slots in both rails. Push the seat forward in the rail, hooking both seat bases onto the pins inside of the rails.
2. Locate the hole in the rail to install the locking pins at the rear of the seat base. If the vehicle has floor mats, pull the flap that has been cut into the mat.
3. Insert the locking pins into the seat base and push the seat to line up the pins with the base.
On a three-passenger seat, the pin with the black cap marked "R" must be installed on the right side and the pin with the gray cap marked "L" on the left side.
On a four-passenger seat, the pins marked "R" must be installed on the half of the seat on the right side. The pins marked "L" must be installed on the half of the seat on the left side.
Three-Passenger Seat Shown
4. Push the pin(s) marked "R" down until they are in the retaining clip.
3-8 Seats and Restraints
Three-Passenger Seat Shown
5. Push the pin(s) marked "L" down until they are in the retaining clip.
6. If the vehicle has a floor mat, put the flap back to its original position.
7. Repeat this procedure for the other seat base.
8. Connect the mini-latch plates for the lap-shoulder belts by inserting the latch plates into the mini-buckles attached at the outboard positions of the bench seat. Do not twist the belts.
9. Check that all locking pins are locked into place before operating the vehicle.
Safety Belts
This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly. It also describes some things not to do with safety belts.
{ WARNING
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, injuries can be much worse than if you are wearing safety belts. You can be seriously injured or killed by hitting things inside the vehicle harder or by being ejected from the vehicle. In addition, anyone who is not buckled up can strike other passengers in the vehicle.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, passengers riding in these areas
(Continued)
Seats and Restraints 3-9
WARNING (Continued)
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow passengers to ride in any area of the vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Always wear a safety belt, and check that all passenger(s) are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 516 for additional information.
Why Safety Belts Work
When riding in a vehicle, you travel as fast as the vehicle does. If the vehicle stops suddenly, you keep going until something stops you. It could be the windshield, the instrument panel, or the safety belts! When you wear a safety belt, you and the vehicle slow down together. There is more time to stop because you stop over a longer distance and, when worn properly, your strongest bones take the forces from the
safety belts. That is why wearing safety belts makes such good sense.
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be -- whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. Your chance of being conscious during and after a crash, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts -- not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
3-10 Seats and Restraints
Also, in nearly all states and in all Canadian provinces, the law requires wearing safety belts.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
There are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 335 or Infants and Young Children on page 337. Follow those rules for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
There are important things to know about wearing a safety belt properly.
. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you.
. Always use the correct buckle for your seating position.
. Wear the lap part of the belt low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
. Wear the shoulder belt over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured, or even killed, by not wearing your safety belt properly.
. Never allow the lap or shoulder belt to become loose or twisted.
. Never wear the shoulder belt under both arms or behind your back.
. Never route the lap or shoulder belt over an armrest.
Seats and Restraints 3-11
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable safety belt and the safety belt is not attached, see "Reinstalling the Rear Seats" under Rear Seats on page 35 for instructions on reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see "Seats" in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 315.
Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See "Safety Belt Height Adjuster" later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt.
3-12 Seats and Restraints
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position. Slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
Safety Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a safety belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger positions.
Adjust the height so the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 310.
To move it down, pull on the center adjuster control labeled PULL. You can move the height adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it has locked into position.
Seats and Restraints 3-13
Safety Belt Pretensioners
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of the vehicle is below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) then the vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the front outboard occupants. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910 to locate the certification label which contains the GVWR.
Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners are activated in a crash, the pretensioners and possibly other parts of the safety belt system will need to be replaced. See Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash on page 316.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort guides. If not, they are available through your dealer. The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed and properly adjusted, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head.
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt:
1. Locate the guide in a pocket on the side of the seatback.
3-14 Seats and Restraints
WARNING (Continued)
and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
(Continued)
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described previously in this section. Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck.
Seats and Restraints 3-15
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the side of the seatback.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
3-16 Seats and Restraints
Safety System Check
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light, safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages are all working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 516 for more information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Safety Belt Care on page 316.
Safety Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the safety belt system in the vehicle. A damaged safety belt system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the safety belt systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
Seats and Restraints 3-17
After a minor crash, replacement of safety belts may not be necessary. But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt system was not being used at the time of the crash.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash, or if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 517.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbag:
. A frontal airbag for the driver.
The vehicle may have the following airbags:
. A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver (cargo van).
. A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger position (cargo or passenger van equipped with a sliding door).
If you have a passenger van with a right front passenger roof-rail airbag and a sliding door, you will also have a separate roof-rail airbag for the passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger and the third row outboard passenger position.
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver, the passenger seated directly behind the driver, and the third row outboard passenger position (passenger van equipped with a sliding or hinged door).
. A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger, the passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger, and the third row outboard passenger position (passenger van equipped with a hinged door).
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim.
3-18 Seats and Restraints
Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:
{ WARNING
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt -- even if you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 321.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are "supplemental restraints" to the safety belts. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or not there is an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with roof-rail airbags.
{ WARNING
Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in the vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 335 or Infants and Young Children on page 337.
Seats and Restraints 3-19 Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 517 for more information.
The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
If the vehicle has one, the right front passenger airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger side.
3-20 Seats and Restraints
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
If the vehicle is a cargo or passenger van with a sliding door and it has a roof-rail airbag for the driver and right front passenger position, the roof-rail airbags are in the ceiling above the side window.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger
Side Similar
If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger, passengers behind the driver and right front passenger, and the third row outboard passengers, the roof-rail airbags are in the ceiling above the side windows. On the driver side of the vehicle, there is one single roof-rail airbag for either vehicles with a hinged door or a sliding door.
For passenger vans with a sliding door, on the passenger side of the vehicle, you will have a separate roof-rail airbag for the passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger and the third row outboard passenger position.
{ WARNING
If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
(Continued)
Seats and Restraints 3-21
WARNING (Continued)
through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver or right front passenger head and chest. However, they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For example:
. If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
. If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
. If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
. If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Single Stage vs. Dual Stage Airbags
Depending on the weight of the vehicle, you will have either "Single Stage Airbags" or "Dual Stage Airbags." Vehicles that have a passenger sensing system also have dual stage airbags. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 519 or Passenger Sensing System on page 328.
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of the vehicle is 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) or above, the vehicle may have single stage airbags. If the GVWR is below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) then the vehicle may have dual stage airbags. You can find the GVWR on the certification label on the rear edge of the driver door. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910 for more information.
3-22 Seats and Restraints
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
The vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page 317. Roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover. Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system's designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts. All roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact.
In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows for the first, second, and third rows (if equipped). See Where Are the Airbags? on page 319 for more information.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail
Seats and Restraints 3-23
airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's upper body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first, second, and third rows, if equipped. The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system can prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 321 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts.
What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 322.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.
{ WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors (if equipped with power door locks), turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate.
3-24 Seats and Restraints
You can lock the doors, and turn off the interior lamps and the hazard warning flashers by using the controls for those features.
{ WARNING
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
. Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
. The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 1314 and Event Data Recorders on page 1314.
. Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service.
Airbag On-Off Switch
If the instrument panel has one of the switches pictured in the following illustrations, the vehicle has an airbag on-off switch that you can use to manually turn on or off the right front passenger airbag.
United States Canada and Mexico
Seats and Restraints 3-25
If the vehicle does not have an airbag on-off switch, it may have a passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System on page 328.
This switch should only be turned to the off position if the person in the right front passenger position is a member of a passenger risk group identified by the national government as follows:
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because:
. My vehicle has no rear seat;
. My vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
. The infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant's physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child's condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because:
. My vehicle has no rear seat;
. Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
. The child has a medical condition which, according to the child's physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child's condition.
3-26 Seats and Restraints
Medical Condition. A passenger has a medical condition which, according to his or her physician:
. Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk for the passenger; and
. Makes the potential harm from the passenger airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the instrument panel or windshield in a crash.
{ WARNING
If the right front passenger airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government, that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there. Do not turn off the passenger airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group.
United States
Canada and Mexico
Seats and Restraints 3-27
To turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag, insert the ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the off position.
The airbag off light will come on to let you know the right front passenger airbag is off. The airbag off light will stay on to remind you that the airbag is off. See Airbag On-Off Light on page 518. The right front passenger airbag will remain off until you turn it back on again.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 517 for more information, including important safety information.
United States
Canada and Mexico
To turn the right front passenger airbag on again, insert the ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the switch to the on position.
The right front passenger frontal airbag is now enabled, and may inflate. See Airbag On-Off Light on page 518 for more information.
3-28 Seats and Restraints
Passenger Sensing System
If the instrument panel has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system unless there is an airbag off switch located on the instrument panel. If there is an airbag off switch, the vehicle does not have a passenger sensing system. See Airbag On-Off Switch on page 324 for more information.
United States
Canada and Mexico
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system check. If you are using remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from a distance, you may not see the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 519.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbag and
roof-rail airbags, if equipped, are not part of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, Children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts.
Seats and Restraints 3-29
A label on the sun visor says, "Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front." This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
. The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
. The system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant seat.
. The system determines that a small child is present in a child restraint.
. The system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat.
. A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time.
. The right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown child restraints.
. Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system.
3-30 Seats and Restraints
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 519.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly -- whether or not there is an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 517 for more information, including important safety information.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing Child Restraints (Rear Seat Position) on page 349 or Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat-Passenger Sensing System) on page 351 or Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off Switch) on page 354.
Seats and Restraints 3-31
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and check with your dealer.
If no rear seat is available, do not install a child restraint in this vehicle.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Adult-Size Occupant
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit.
This allows the system to detect that person and then enable the right front passenger frontal airbag.
3-32 Seats and Restraints
Additional Factors Affecting System Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See "Safety Belts" and "Child Restraints" in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 333 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates.
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is not desired remove the object from the seat.
{ WARNING
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system.
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 1312.
{ WARNING
For up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle's frame, bumper system, height, front end or side sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from working properly. Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position, which includes sensors that are part of the passenger
Seats and Restraints 3-33
seat. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System on page 328.
If you have any questions about this, you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify the vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 131.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 1064 for additional important information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 131.
3-34 Seats and Restraints
In addition, your dealer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 517 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? on page 319. See your dealer for service.
Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the airbag systems in the vehicle. A damaged airbag system may not work properly and may not protect you and your passenger(s) in a crash, resulting in serious injury or even death. To help make sure the airbag systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on when you are driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 517 for more information.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle safety belts.
Seats and Restraints 3-35
The manufacturer's instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the fit test below:
. Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See "Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides" under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 311 for more information. If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.
. Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
. Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Also see "Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides" under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 311.
3-36 Seats and Restraints
According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt. The safety belt cannot properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
Seats and Restraints 3-37
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly become a
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's arms. An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint.
3-38 Seats and Restraints
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child's weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs.
{ WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash, infants need complete support. This is because an infant's neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
distributed across the strongest part of an infant's body, the back and shoulders. Infants should always be secured in rear-facing child restraints.
Seats and Restraints 3-39 Child Restraint Systems
{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints.
(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
A forward-facing child seat (B) provides restraint for the child's body with the harness.
3-40 Seats and Restraints
(C) Booster Seats
A booster seat (C) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle safety belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 343 for more information. Children can be
endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
In some areas of the United States and Canada, Certified Child Passenger Safety Technicians (CPSTs) are available to inspect and demonstrate how to correctly use and install child restraints.
Seats and Restraints 3-41
In the U.S., refer to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) website to locate the nearest child safety seat inspection station. For CPST availability in Canada, check with Transport Canada or the Provincial Ministry of Transportation office.
Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts.
If a child restraint is secured in the right front passenger seat, and there is a switch on the instrument panel to manually turn off the right front passenger airbag. See Airbag On-Off Switch on page 324 and Securing Child Restraints (Rear Seat Position) on page 349 or Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat-Passenger Sensing System) on page 351 or Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off Switch) on page 354 for more information, including important safety information.
3-42 Seats and Restraints
A label on the sun visor says, "Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front." This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system or airbag switch has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Child restraints and booster seats vary considerably in size, and some may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make sure the child restraint is properly secured.
Depending on where you place the child restraint and the size of the child restraint, you may not be able to access adjacent safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child restraints. Adjacent seating positions should not be used if the child restraint prevents access to or interferes with the routing of the safety belt.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.
Seats and Restraints 3-43
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether strap and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments. The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (B).
3-44 Seats and Restraints
Top Tether Anchor
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations
Second, Third, and Fourth Row with Three-Passenger Seat
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors. See the information following for installing a child restraint with a top tether in the second, third, and fourth row center positions.
Seats and Restraints 3-45
Do not install three child restraints in the same row at the same time and never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.
Front Passenger Position
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
The second, third, and fourth row with three-passenger seats have exposed metal lower anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.
Second, Third, and Fourth Row with Three-Passenger Seat -- Passenger Van
There are two top tether anchors in the second-, third-, and fourth-row three-passenger seats. To install a child restraint in the rear driver-side seating positions, use anchor point (A). To install a child restraint in the rear passenger-side seating positions, use anchor point (B).
To install a child restraint in the rear center seating positions, use anchor point (B). Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.
If the vehicle is equipped with a four-passenger fourth- or fifth-row seat, it does not have upper or lower anchors. If a child restraint is placed in the four-passenger fourth or fifth-row seat, it must be secured using the vehicle safety belts. See "Rear Seat Position" under Securing Child Restraints (Rear Seat Position) on page 349 or Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat-Passenger Sensing System) on page 351 or Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off Switch) on page 354 for more information.
3-46 Seats and Restraints
Front Passenger Position
There is a top tether anchor for the front passenger position with a front passenger seat. The anchor is located at the rear of the seat cushion on the right front passenger seat.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 341 for additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System
{ WARNING
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type child restraint properly using the anchors, or use the vehicle safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual.
{ WARNING
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
of the retractor to set the lock, if the vehicle has one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle's safety belts. This may damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint
Seats and Restraints 3-47
does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts. Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. For the second, third, and fourth row with three-passenger seats only, in the rear driver-side seating positions, use anchor point (A). For the rear passenger-side seating positions, use anchor point (B). For the center seating positions, use anchor point (B). Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor.
3-48 Seats and Restraints
2.3. Route and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions:
If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback.
If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback.
If the position you are using has an integrated headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether around the headrest or head restraint.
Seats and Restraints 3-49
If the position you are using has an integrated headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the headrest or head restraint.
3. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the LATCH path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. There should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement for proper installation.
Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the LATCH system is working properly after a crash, see your dealer to have the system inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints (Rear Seat Position)
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 343 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 343 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
3-50 Seats and Restraints
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 341.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
Seats and Restraints 3-51
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 4 and 5.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 343 for more information.
7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat-Passenger Sensing System)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 341.
On vehicles with a passenger sensing system, the system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System on page 328 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 519 for more information, including important safety information.
3-52 Seats and Restraints
A label on the sun visor says, "Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front." This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 328 for additional information.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 343 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 343 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.
Seats and Restraints 3-53
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 519.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
3-54 Seats and Restraints
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 343 for more information.
8. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started.
If the child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, see "If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint" under Passenger Sensing System on page 328 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing Child Restraints (Front Seat-Airbag On/Off Switch)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 341.
On vehicles with an airbag on/off switch, you can use this feature to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag. The switch is located on the instrument panel. See Airbag On-Off Switch on page 324 for more information, including important safety information.
Seats and Restraints 3-55
A label on the sun visor says, "Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front." This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the airbag switch has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 517 for more information, including important safety information.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
3-56 Seats and Restraints
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 343 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 343 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint.
If you have no other choice but to install a rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make sure the airbag is off once the child restraint has been installed.
When the airbag off switch has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator in the airbag off light should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started. See Airbag On-Off Light on page 518.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
Seats and Restraints 3-57
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 343 for more information.
8. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
3-58 Seats and Restraints
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
If you turned the airbag off with the switch, turn on the right front passenger airbag when you remove the child restraint from the vehicle unless the person who will be sitting there is a member of a passenger airbag risk group. See Airbag On-Off Switch on page 324 for more information, including important safety information.
Storage
Storage Compartments Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments
Front Storage
This vehicle may have a front storage compartment. It is located at the center of the instrument panel extension, by the floor. To open the compartment, pull up on the latch. The compartment will open automatically.
Storage compartments may also be included on the inside of each front door.
Storage 4-1
4-2 Storage
2 NOTES
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Controls
Controls Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Engine Oil Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17 Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-20 Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-24 StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-24 Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-25 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-26 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Information Displays Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Vehicle Messages Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Battery Voltage and Charging Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-33 Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Engine Cooling System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-35 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-35 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-36 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-36 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Ride Control System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-38 Anti-theft Alarm System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-38 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-39 Vehicle Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Vehicle Personalization Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-40
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment
For vehicles with a tilt steering wheel, the lever is located on the left side of the steering column. To adjust the steering wheel: 1. Pull the lever to move the
steering wheel up or down into a comfortable position. 2. Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Steering Wheel Controls
If available, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. See Cruise Control on page 935 for more information on other steering wheel control.
w (Next): Press to go to the next
favorite radio station, track on a CD, or folder on an iPod® or USB device.
c / x (Previous/End): Press to
go to the previous favorite radio station, track on a CD, or folder on an iPod® or USB device. Also press to reject an incoming call, or end a current call.
Radio
To select preset or favorite radio stations:
Press and release w or c / x to
go to the next or previous radio station stored as a preset or favorite.
CD
To select tracks on a CD:
Press and release w or c / x to
go to the next or previous track.
Selecting Tracks on an iPod or USB Device
1. Press and hold w or c / x
while listening to a song until the contents of the current folder display on the radio display.
Instruments and Controls 5-3
2. Press and release w or c / x
to scroll up or down the list, then
press and hold w, or press ¨ to
play the highlighted track.
Navigating Folders on an iPod or USB Device
1. Press and hold w or c / x
while listening to a song until the contents of the current folder display on the radio display.
2. Press and hold c / x to go
back to the previous folder list.
3. Press and release w or c / x
to scroll up or down the list.
. To select a folder, press
and hold w, or press ¨
when the folder is highlighted.
. To go back further in the folder list, press and
hold c / x.
b / g (Push to Talk): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar® systems, press and hold for longer than two seconds to interact with those systems. See Bluetooth on page 722 and OnStar Overview on page 141 for more information.
SRCE (Source/Voice Recognition): Press to switch between the radio and CD, and for equipped vehicles, the front auxiliary.
¨ (Seek): Press to go to the
next radio station while in AM, FM, or XMTM.
For vehicles with a CD Player or USB port:
Press ¨ to go to the next track or
chapter while sourced to the CD.
Press ¨ to select a track or a folder
when navigating folders on an iPod or USB device.
While listening to a CD, press and
hold ¨ to quickly move forward
through the tracks. Release to stop on the desired track.
+ e : Press to increase volume.
- e : Press to decrease volume.
Horn
Press the horn symbol in the middle of the steering wheel to sound the horn.
5-4 Instruments and Controls
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper control is located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering wheel.
Turn the band with N on it to select
the wiper speed.
8 (Mist): Use for a single wipe. Hold the band on z, then
release. For several wipes, hold
the band on z longer. 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Use
to adjust the delay time between wipes. Turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes.
d (Low Speed): Slow wipes. a (High Speed): Fast wipes. 9 (Off): Use to turn the
wipers off.
When driving during the day and the wipers are activated, the head lamps automatically turn on after completing eight wipe cycles.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged blades should be replaced.
Windshield Washer
The windshield wiper paddle is located on top of the multifunction lever.
L (Washer Fluid): Push the
paddle to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or return to the preset speed.
{ WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.
Compass
This vehicle may have a compass in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
Your dealer will set the correct zone for your location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state or province, it will be necessary to compensate for compass variance by resetting the zone through the DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Instruments and Controls 5-5
Compass variance is the difference between the earth's magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may give false readings. The compass must be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
Press T until PRESS V TO
CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays.
2. Find the vehicle's current location and variance zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press V to scroll through
and select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press 3 until the vehicle
heading, for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass. See "Compass Calibration Procedure" following.
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location, such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, or other industrial structures, if possible.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the compass should be calibrated.
5-6 Instruments and Controls
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example, N for North, or the heading does not change after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount, a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad holder, or any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move the magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the compass.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the compass zone is set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is located. See "Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure" earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window, climate controls, seats, etc. during the calibration procedure.
2. Press T until PRESS V TO
CALIBRATE COMPASS displays.
3. Press V to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less than 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete the calibration. The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a few seconds when the calibration is complete. The DIC display will then return to
PRESS V TO CALIBRATE
COMPASS.
Clock
AM/FM Radio with Optional CD Player
If the vehicle has an AM/FM radio with an optional CD player, it has
a H button for setting the time. With
these types of radios, the clock can be set with either the radio turned on or off.
Set the time by following these steps:
1. Press H until the hour begins
flashing on display. Press this button a second time and the minutes begin flashing on display.
Press H a third time and the
12HR or 24HR time format begins flashing.
2. While either the hour or the minutes are flashing, turn
the f knob, located on the upper
right side of the radio, clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
Instruments and Controls 5-7
or decrease the time. While the 12HR or 24HR time format is
flashing, turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to select the default time settings.
3. Press H again until the clock
display stops flashing to set the currently displayed time; otherwise, the flashing stops after five seconds and the current time displayed is automatically set.
MP3 Radio with a Single CD Player
If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD (MP3) player, the radio
has a H button for setting the time
and date.
To set the time and date, follow the instructions:
1. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
2. Press the softkey located under any one of the tabs that you want to change. Every time the softkey is pressed again, the time or the date if selected, increases by one.
Another way to increase the time
or date, is to press ¨ SEEK or \ FWD (forward).
3. To decrease, press © SEEK or s REV. You can also turn the f knob, located on the upper
right side of the radio, to adjust the selected setting.
Changing the Time and Date Default Settings
You can change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year.
To change the time or date default settings, follow these instructions:
1. Press H and then the softkey
located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month) are displayed.
2. Press the softkey located under the desired option.
3. Press H again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
5-8 Instruments and Controls
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
If the vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the radio has a
MENU button instead of H to set
the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. Once
the H option displays, press the
softkey located under that tab. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays.
2. Press the softkey located under any one of the tabs to change. Every time the softkey is pressed again, the time or the date if selected, increases by one.
Another way to increase the time
or date, is to press ¨ SEEK or \ FWD (forward).
3. To decrease, press © SEEK or s REV, or turn the f knob,
located on the upper right side of the radio, to adjust the selected setting.
Changing the Time and Date Default Settings
To change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month/ day/year to day/month/year.
To change the time or date default settings, follow these instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. Once
the H option displays, press
the softkey located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month) displays.
2. Press the softkey located under the desired option.
3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out.
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cell phone or an MP3 player.
The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets located on the instrument panel.
Remove the cover to access and replace when not in use.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could overload vehicle or adapter fuses. If a problem is experienced, see your dealer.
Instruments and Controls 5-9
{ WARNING
Power is always supplied to the outlets. Do not leave electrical equipment plugged in when the vehicle is not in use because the vehicle could catch fire and cause injury or death.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for an extended period of time while the vehicle is off will drain the battery. Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment on page 955.
Notice: Hanging heavy equipment from the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. The power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only, such as cell phone charge cords.
Cigarette Lighter
To use the cigarette lighter, if the vehicle has one, push it in all the way, and let go. When it is ready for use, it will pop back out by itself.
Do not use the lighter to plug in accessory devices. Use the power outlets provided.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating does not let the lighter back away from the heating element when it is hot. Damage from overheating can occur to the lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
5-10 Instruments and Controls
Ashtrays
The vehicle may have a removable ashtray. The ashtray can be placed into the front floor console cupholder. Open cover to use.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the ashtray.
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there could be a problem with a vehicle function. Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working.
Gauges can indicate when there could be a problem with a vehicle function. Often gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
Instrument Cluster
Instruments and Controls 5-11
English 4-Speed Version Shown, 6-Speed and Metric Similar
5-12 Instruments and Controls
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle's speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. The digital odometer will read 999,999 if it is turned back.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, it must be set to the mileage total of the old odometer. If that is not possible, then it must be set at zero and a label must be put on the driver door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero.
Press the 3 on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) switch to display the trip odometer and the regular odometer information.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 527 for more information on resetting the trip odometer.
To display the odometer reading
with the ignition off, press the 3
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) switch.
Fuel Gauge
Metric
Instruments and Controls 5-13
The fuel gauge, when the ignition is on, indicates how much fuel is left in the vehicle fuel tank.
An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on.
The gauge first indicates empty before the vehicle is out of fuel, and the fuel tank should be refueled soon.
Listed are four situations customers might experience with the fuel gauge. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gauge:
. At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gauge reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank's capacity to fill the tank.
. The gauge moves a little while turning a corner or speeding up.
. The gauge does not go back to empty when the ignition is turned off.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine , see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
English
5-14 Instruments and Controls
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Metric
English
The oil pressure gauge shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals) when the engine is running.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problem causing low oil pressure. Check the oil as soon as possible.
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The engine can become so hot that it catches fire. Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Instruments and Controls 5-15
the 125°C (260°F) mark, it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity. See Engine Overheating on page 1021.
Voltmeter Gauge
Metric
English
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is working. During a majority of the operation, the gauge wil read 100°C (210°F) or less. If the vehicle is pulling a load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 122°C (250°F) mark. If the gauge reaches
When the engine is not running, but the ignition is on, this gauge shows the battery's state of charge in DC volts.
5-16 Instruments and Controls
When the engine is running, the gauge shows the condition of the charging system. Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power.
The vehicle can be only driven for a short time with the reading in either warning zone. If it must be driven, turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
Safety Belt Reminders
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light There is a driver safety belt reminder light on the instrument panel cluster.
When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind the driver to fasten their safety belt. Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle may continue several times if the driver remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving.
If the driver safety belt is buckled, neither the light nor the chime comes on. Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety belt reminder light, several seconds after the engine is started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. The passenger safety belt light flashes and then stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle continues several times if the passenger remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving.
Instruments and Controls 5-17
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on.
The passenger safety belt reminder light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device. To turn off the reminder light and/or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag's electrical system for possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor(s), the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System on page 317.
The airbag readiness light flashes for a few seconds when the engine is started. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed immediately.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means the airbag system might not be working properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the vehicle serviced right away.
For vehicles with a remote start, the airbag readiness light will stay on until the driver places the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come on. See Airbag System Messages on page 538 for more information.
5-18 Instruments and Controls
Airbag On-Off Light
When the right front passenger airbag is manually turned off using the airbag on-off switch on the instrument panel, if equipped, the indicator light OFF or the off symbol will come on and stay on as a reminder that the airbag has been turned off. This light will go off when the airbag has been turned on. See Airbag On-Off Switch on page 324 for more information, including important safety information.
United States
Canada and Mexico
{ WARNING
If the right front passenger airbag is turned off for a person who is not in a risk group identified by the national government, that person will not have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect the person sitting there.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Do not turn off the passenger airbag unless the person sitting there is in a risk group identified by the national government. See Airbag On-Off Switch on page 324 for more on this, including important safety information.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. For example, the right front passenger airbag could inflate even though the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
(Continued)
Instruments and Controls 5-19
WARNING (Continued)
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 517 for more information, including important safety information.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If the vehicle has a passenger sensing system, the instrument panel will have a passenger airbag status indicator. See Passenger Sensing System on page 328 for important safety information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit, it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled, and may inflate. See Airbag On-Off Switch on page 324 for more information, including important safety information.
United States
for on and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you are using remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from a distance, you may not see the system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled, and may inflate.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag.
Canada and Mexico
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
5-20 Instruments and Controls
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer for service.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 517 for more information, including important safety information.
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to START, but the engine is not running, as a check to show it is working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem with the charging system. A charging system message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear. See Battery Voltage and Charging Messages on page 533 for more information. This light could indicate
that there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors the operation of the vehicle to ensure emissions are at acceptable levels, to produce a cleaner environment. This light comes on when the vehicle is placed in ON/RUN, as a check to show it is working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. See Ignition Positions on page 915 for more information.
Instruments and Controls 5-21
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on and stays on while the engine is running, this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on, the emission controls might not work as well, the vehicle fuel economy might not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission controls and can cause this light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/ Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modifications on page 103.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard accelerations.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, stop and park the vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
Light On Steady: An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required.
5-22 Instruments and Controls
The following may correct an emission system malfunction:
. Check that the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling the Tank on page 941. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
. Check that good quality fuel is used. Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and may cause stalling after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
See Recommended Fuel on page 938.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle. The dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
Some local governments may have programs to inspect the on-vehicle emission control equipment. For the inspection, the emission system test equipment is connected to the vehicle's Data Link Connector (DLC).
The DLC is under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. See your dealer if assistance is needed.
The vehicle may not pass inspection if:
. The malfunction indicator lamp is on with the engine running, or if the light does not come on when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN while the engine is off. See your dealer for assistance in verifying proper operation of the malfunction indicator lamp.
. The OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. This can
Instruments and Controls 5-23
happen if the 12-volt battery has recently been replaced or run down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. This can take several days of routine driving. If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness, your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle brake system consists of two hydraulic circuits. If one circuit is not working, the remaining circuit can still work to stop the vehicle. For normal braking performance, both circuits need to be working.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake problem. Have the brake system inspected right away.
Metric
English
This light should come on briefly when ignition key is turned to ON/ RUN. If it does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light also comes on when the parking brake is set. See Parking Brake on page 932 for more information. The light stays on if the parking brake does not fully release. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it means the vehicle has a brake problem.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push, or the pedal might go closer to the floor. It could take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing the Vehicle on page 1085.
{ WARNING
The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service.
5-24 Instruments and Controls
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System (ABS), this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 523.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
For vehicles with the Tow/Haul Mode feature, this light comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode has been activated. For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on page 930.
StabiliTrak® OFF Light
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light then goes off. Press and release the Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak button to turn off TCS, and a message displays in the DIC. Press and briefly hold the TCS/ StabiliTrak button to turn off the StabiliTrak system; the StabiliTrak Off light comes on and a message appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Instruments and Controls 5-25
If the StabiliTrak/TCS system is off, the system does not assist in controlling the vehicle. Turn on the StabiliTrak/TCS system and the indicator light turns off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 933, and Ride Control System Messages on page 537 for more information.
Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
The Traction Control System (TCS)/ StabiliTrak light comes on briefly when the engine is started.
If the light does not come on or stays on, have the vehicle serviced by the dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off.
If the light comes on and stays on while driving, and a message displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC), have the vehicle serviced by the dealer. See Ride Control System Messages on page 537 for more information.
If the light flashes while driving, this means that the StabiliTrak or the TCS is assisting in controlling the vehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on page 933 for more information.
Four chimes sound if the light turns on.
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. It provides information about tire pressures and the TPMS. When the Light Is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly underinflated. A Driver Information Center (DIC) tire pressure message may also display. See Vehicle Messages on page 532 for more information. Stop as soon as possible, and inflate the tires to the pressure value shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure on page 1054 for more information.
5-26 Instruments and Controls
When the Light Flashes First and Then Is On Steady If the light flashes for about a minute and then stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. If the problem is not corrected, the light will come on at every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 1056 for more information.
Engine Oil Pressure Light
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be low on oil and it might have some other system problem.
Security Light
The immobilizer light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off. If the light stays on and the engine does not start, there could be a problem with the theft-deterrent system. See Immobilizer Operation on page 211 for more information.
High-Beam On Light
This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 62 for more information.
Instruments and Controls 5-27
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light comes on whenever the cruise control is set. The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off. See Cruise Control on page 935 for more information.
Information Displays
Driver Information Center (DIC)
This vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster. The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel, next to the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system information, and warning messages if a system problem is detected.
5-28 Instruments and Controls
If the vehicle has these features, the DIC also displays the compass direction and the outside air temperature when viewing the trip and fuel information. The compass direction appears on the top right corner of the DIC display. The outside air temperature automatically appears in the bottom right corner of the DIC display. If there is a problem with the system that controls the temperature display, the numbers will be replaced with dashes. If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax® diesel supplement for more information.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel, next to the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Buttons
The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle information, customization, and set/ reset buttons. The button functions are detailed in the following pages.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
to display the odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, average economy, fuel used, timer, average speed, and digital tachometer.
T (Vehicle Information): Press
this button to display the oil life, units, tire pressure readings for vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), engine hours, Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) programming for vehicles with the TPMS and without a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, and compass zone and compass calibration on vehicles with this feature.
U (Customization): Press this
button to customize the feature settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle Personalization on page 540 for more information.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to
set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC.
Instruments and Controls 5-29
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
to scroll through the following menu items:
Odometer
Press 3 until XX km (mi)
displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi).
Trip Odometers
Press 3 until A or B displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi) since the last reset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometers can be used at the same time.
Each trip odometer can be reset to
zero separately by pressing V while
the desired trip odometer is displayed.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of kilometers (miles) driven since the ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset
feature, press and hold V for
at least four seconds. The trip odometer will display the number of kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 8 km (5 miles) before it is started again, and then the retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will show 8 km (5 miles). As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then increase to 8.1 km (5.1 miles), 8.2 km (5.2 miles), etc.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the vehicle is started, but before it begins moving, the display will show the number of kilometers (km) or miles (mi) that were driven during the last ignition cycle.
Fuel Range
Press 3 until FUEL RANGE
displays. This display shows the approximate number of remaining kilometers (km) or miles (mi) the vehicle can be driven without refueling. The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
5-30 Instruments and Controls
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent stops, this display may read one number, but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving.
If the vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will be displayed. See "FUEL LEVEL LOW" under Fuel System Messages on page 536 for more information.
Average Economy
Press 3 until AVG ECONOMY
displays. This display shows the approximate average liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). This number is calculated based on the number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the last time this menu item was reset.
To reset AVG ECONOMY, press
and hold V. The display will return
to zero.
Fuel Used
Press 3 until FUEL USED
displays. This display shows the number of liters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used information, press and
hold V while FUEL USED is
displayed.
Timer
Press 3 until TIMER displays.
This display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press V while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being shown on the DIC. The timer will
record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will return to zero.
To stop the timer, press V briefly
while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and
hold V while TIMER is displayed.
Average Speed
Press 3 until AVERAGE SPEED
displays. This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph). This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this value. To reset the
value, press and hold V. The
display will return to zero.
Digital Tachometer
Press 3 until
Tachometer ##00 RPM displays. This display shows the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM).
Instruments and Controls 5-31
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press
this button to scroll through the following menu items:
Oil Life
Press T until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See "CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON" under Engine Oil Messages on page 535. You should change the
oil as soon as possible. See Engine Oil on page 107. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Maintenance Schedule on page 113 for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life System on page 109.
Units
Press T until UNITS displays.
This display allows you to select between metric or English units of measurement. Once in this display,
press V to select between METRIC
or ENGLISH units.
Tire Pressure
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi). Press T until
the DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
Press T again until the DIC
displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving, a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display. See Tire Pressure on page 1054 and Tire Messages on page 539 for more information.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value, there may be a problem with the vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see your dealer for service.
5-32 Instruments and Controls
Engine Hours
Press T until ENGINE HOURS
displays. This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run.
Relearn Tire Positions
The vehicle may have this display. To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park). If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor, the system must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 1055. See Tire Inspection on page 1060, Tire Rotation on page 1060 and Tire Messages on page 539 for more information.
Change Compass Zone
The vehicle may have this feature. To change the compass zone through the DIC, see Compass on page 54.
Calibrate Compass
The vehicle may have this feature. The compass can be manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass through the DIC, see Compass on page 54.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Messages
Messages displayed on the DIC indicate the status of the vehicle or some action may be needed to correct a condition. Multiple messages may appear one after another.
The messages that do not require immediate action can be acknowledged and cleared by
pressing V (Set/Reset).
The messages that require immediate action cannot be cleared until that action is performed.
All messages should be taken seriously and clearing the message does not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages and some information about them.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax® diesel supplement for more information.
Instruments and Controls 5-33
Battery Voltage and Charging Messages
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system. Under certain conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System Light on page 520. Driving with this problem could drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible. See your dealer.
Brake System Messages
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake system warning light if there is a problem with the brake system. See Brake System Warning Light on page 523. If this message appears, stop as soon as possible
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the brake system needs service as soon as possible. See your dealer.
Compass Messages
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN CIRCLES
This message displays when calibrating the compass. Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 8 km/h (5 mph) to complete the calibration. See Compass on page 54 for more information.
CALIBRATION COMPLETE
This message displays when the compass calibration is complete. See Compass on page 54 for more information.
Door Ajar Messages
CARGO DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the cargo door is open while the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the cargo door. Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
5-34 Instruments and Controls
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
On some vehicles, this message displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
On some vehicles, this message displays and a chime sounds if the passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and
close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
Engine Cooling System Messages
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 515. To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can continue to drive the vehicle.
If this message continues to appear, have the system repaired by your dealer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive the vehicle while the engine is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 1021 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 515.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive the vehicle while the engine is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
Instruments and Controls 5-35
vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 1021 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature.
Engine Oil Messages
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message. See Engine Oil Life System on page 109 for information on how to reset the message. See Engine Oil on page 107 and Maintenance Schedule on page 113 for more information.
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL
If the vehicle has an oil level sensor, this message displays if the oil level in the vehicle is low. Check the oil level and correct it as necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure this message clears. See Engine Oil on page 107 for additional information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive the vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See Engine Oil on page 107 for more information.
This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. See Engine Oil on page 107.
Engine Power Messages
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays and a chime sounds when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters the engine coolant protection mode. See Engine Overheating on page 1021 for further information.
This message also displays when the engine power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
5-36 Instruments and Controls
If this message is on, but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible.
Fuel System Messages
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel Gauge on page 513 and Fuel on page 938 for more information.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message may display along with the check engine light on the instrument panel cluster if the fuel cap is not tightened properly.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 520. Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank on page 941. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light and message off.
Key and Lock Messages
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter. See "Battery Replacement" under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 23.
Lamp Messages
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned off. See Exterior Lamp Controls on page 61 for more information.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned on. See Exterior Lamp Controls on page 61 for more information.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 1.2 km (3/4 of a mile). Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
Instruments and Controls 5-37
Ride Control System Messages
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message displays, it means there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak system. If you see this message, try to reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should see your dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive, however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays when there is a problem with the Traction Control System (TCS). When this message displays, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See your dealer for service. See StabiliTrak® System on page 933 for more information.
STABILITRAK INITIALIZING
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message may display and the Traction Control System (TCS)/ StabiliTrak light on the instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the vehicle and exceeding 32 km/h (20 mph) for 30 seconds. The StabiliTrak system is not functional until the light has turned off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 933 for more information.
TRACTION XX STABILITRAK XX
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays when the traction control and/or StabiliTrak systems have been turned on or off. Adjust your driving accordingly. To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system, you should normally leave StabiliTrak on.
However, you should turn StabiliTrak off if the vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want to rock the vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions and require more wheel spin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 99. To turn the StabiliTrak system on or off, see StabiliTrak® System on page 933.
STABILITRAK OFF may also display when the stability control has been automatically disabled. There are several conditions that can cause this message to appear.
. One condition is overheating, which could occur if StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended period of time.
. The message also displays if the brake system warning light is on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 523.
5-38 Instruments and Controls
. The message could display if the stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions.
. The message displays if an engine or vehicle related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service. See your dealer.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present.
Airbag System Messages
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system. Have your dealer inspect the system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 517 and Airbag System on page 317 for more information.
Anti-theft Alarm System Messages
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine. See Immobilizer Operation on page 211 for more information.
WAIT TO START
This message displays briefly when the theft-deterrent system has initially found incorrect conditions within the vehicle and is making a double check. If your vehicle does not start soon after, try to start it again. If it still does not start, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.
Service Vehicle Messages
SERVICE A/C SYSTEM
This message displays when the electronic sensors that control the air conditioning and heating systems are no longer working. Have the climate control system serviced by your dealer if you notice a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE THROTTLE
This message displays if the starting of the engine is disabled due to the electronic throttle control system. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.
Instruments and Controls 5-39
This message only appears while the ignition is in ON/RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is resolved.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
Tire Messages
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the tires is low. The low tire pressure warning light will also come on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 525. This message will also indicate which tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to those
shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See Tires on page 1046, Vehicle Load Limits on page 910, and Tire Pressure on page 1054. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 527.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays if a part on the system is not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 525. Several conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 1056 for more information. If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your dealer.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays when the system is re-learning the tire positions on the vehicle. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 527 for more information. The tire positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection on page 1060, Tire Rotation on page 1060, Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 1056, and Tire Pressure on page 1054 for more information.
Transmission Messages
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem with the transmission. See your dealer for service.
5-40 Instruments and Controls
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive the vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you can damage the transmission. This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by the warranty. Do not drive the vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed.
This message displays along with a chime if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message clears and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level.
Vehicle Reminder Messages
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Vehicle Personalization
This vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting. Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
All of the customization options may not be available on your vehicle. Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the customization features were set when the vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed from their default state since then.
The customization preferences are automatically recalled.
Instruments and Controls 5-41
To change customization preferences, use the following procedure.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in P (Park).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press U to enter the feature
settings menu.
If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering the menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park).
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set. This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English.
Press U until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to display all DIC messages in English.
LANGUAGE
This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear.
Press U until the LANGUAGE
screen appears on the DIC display.
Press V once to access the settings for this feature. Then press U to
scroll through the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in English.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. A beep will sound once a language has been selected.
5-42 Instruments and Controls
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select when the doors will automatically lock.
Press U until AUTO DOOR LOCK
appears on the DIC display.
Press V once to access the settings for this feature. Then press U to
scroll through the following settings:
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 13 km/h (8 mph) for three seconds.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock.
Press U until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC
display. Press V once to access
the settings for this feature. Then
press U to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 23 for more information.
Instruments and Controls 5-43
Press U until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display.
Press V once to access the settings for this feature. Then press U to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback
when you press Q on the RKE
transmitter.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps
will flash when you press Q on the
RKE transmitter.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound
on the second press of Q on the
RKE transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will flash when you
press Q on the RKE transmitter, and the horn will sound when Q is
pressed again within five seconds of the previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 23 for more information.
Press U until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC
display. Press V once to access
the settings for this feature. Then
press U to scroll through the
following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps
will not flash when you press K on
the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior
lamps will flash when you press K
on the RKE transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not the locking of the doors will be delayed. When locking the doors with the power door lock switch and a door is open, this feature will delay locking the doors until five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work.
5-44 Instruments and Controls
You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch twice
or Q on the RKE transmitter twice.
See Delayed Locking on page 27 for more information.
Press U until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display.
Press V once to access the settings for this feature. Then press U to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle's doors.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door is closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside. This happens after the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
Press U until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display.
Press V once to access the settings for this feature. Then press U to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
10 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on for 10 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have the exterior lamps turn on briefly during low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press U until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC
display. Press V once to access
the settings for this feature. Then
press U to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior lamps will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Instruments and Controls 5-45
The lamps will remain on for
20 seconds or until Q on the RKE
transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 23 for more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime.
Press U until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display.
Press V once to access the settings for this feature. Then press U to
scroll through the following settings:
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal level.
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will stay at the last known setting.
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
FACTORY SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings.
Press U until FACTORY SETTINGS
appears on the DIC display.
Press V once to access the settings for this feature. Then press U to
scroll through the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press V while
the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.
Press U until FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the DIC display. Press V once to exit
the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing U will
return you to the beginning of the feature settings menu.
5-46 Instruments and Controls
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of the following occurs:
. The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
. The 3 or T DIC buttons are
pressed.
. The end of the feature settings menu is reached and exited.
. A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting
Exterior Lighting Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4 Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Interior Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lighting Features Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls
The exterior lamp control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. It controls the following systems: . Headlamps . Taillamps . Parking Lamps . License Plate Lamps . Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
O (Off): Briefly turn the control to
this position to turn the automatic headlamps and Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) off or back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position only works for vehicles that are shifted into the P (Park) position.
AUTO (Automatic): Turns on the headlamps automatically at normal brightness, together with the following:
. Parking Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
. Taillamps
. License Plate Lamps
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on
the parking lamps together with the following:
. Instrument Panel Lights
. Taillamps
. License Plate Lamps
6-2 Lighting
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps together with the following:
. Parking Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
. Taillamps
. License Plate Lamps
If the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on, the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. If the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will continue to stay on. To prevent the battery from being drained, turn the control to the
O position.
A warning chime sounds if the driver door is opened while the ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on.
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever all the way toward you. Then release it.
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder
If a door is open, a reminder chime sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and the key is out of the ignition. To turn off the chime, turn the
headlamp switch to O or AUTO and
then back on, or close and re-open the door. In the auto mode, the headlamps turn off once the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or may remain on until the headlamp delay ends, if enabled in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See "Exit Lighting" under Vehicle Personalization on page 540.
Headlamp High/ Low-Beam Changer
2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer): Pull the turn signal lever all the way toward you to change the headlamps from low to high beam. Then release it.
This instrument panel cluster light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature is used to signal to the vehicle ahead that you want to pass.
If the headlamps are off or in the low-beam position, pull the turn signal lever toward you to momentarily switch to high beams.
Release the lever to turn the high-beam headlamps off.
Lighting 6-3
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of the vehicle during the day. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system comes on in daylight when the following conditions are met:
. The ignition is on.
. The exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position.
. The shift lever is not in P (Park).
. The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, the taillamps, sidemarker, instrument panel lights, and other lamps will not be on.
The automatic headlamp system automatically switches from DRL to the headlamps depending on the darkness of the surroundings.
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior
lamp control to O and then release
it. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must be in the P (Park) position, before the DRL can be turned off.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp switch is in AUTO, the automatic headlamp system turns on the headlamps, along with the taillamps, sidemarker lamps, parking lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the exterior lamp control to the off position and then release. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must be in the P (Park) position, before the automatic headlamp system can be turned off.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor; otherwise the system will come on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp system so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system.
6-4 Lighting
The DRL and automatic headlamp system are only affected when the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately 30 seconds for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel Illumination Control on page 65.
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flashers):
Press this button located on top of the steering column, to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others that you are having trouble. Press again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle's turn signals will not work.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
G : An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. The turn signal automatically flashes three times and if the Tow/Haul Mode is active it flashes six times. Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second causes the turn signals to flash continually until the lever is released.
The lever returns to its starting position when released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be burned out.
Have any burned out bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 1040.
Turn Signal On Chime
If the turn signal is left on for more than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime sounds at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON also appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Lamp Messages on page 536. To turn off the chime and message, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination Control
The knob for this feature is located to the left of the steering column.
D (Instrument Panel Lights):
Push the knob to extend and then turn clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the instrument
Lighting 6-5
panel lights and the radio display. This only works if the headlamps or parking lamps are on.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened. They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The instrument panel brightness
knob extends when D is pressed.
To manually turn on the dome
lamps, press D then turn the knob
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
6-6 Lighting
Dome Lamp Override
The E DOME OFF button is
located above the instrument panel brightness knob.
The dome lamp override sets the dome lamps to remain off or come on automatically when a door is opened.
E DOME OFF: Press this button
in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
Reading Lamps
For vehicles with reading lamps, press the button located next to each lamp to turn it on or off.
The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other locations. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
Lighting Features
Entry/Exit Lighting
The vehicle has an illuminated entry/exit feature.
The dome lamps come on if
the E DOME OFF button is in the
extended position, when a door is opened or the key is removed from the ignition.
Battery Load Management
The vehicle may have Electric Power Management (EPM) that estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery.
Lighting 6-7
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message might be displayed, such as SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM. If this messages displays, it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See Battery Voltage and Charging Messages on page 533.
Battery Power Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF. This helps to prevent the battery from running down.
6-8 Lighting
2 NOTES
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment System
Introduction Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Radio AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Fixed Mast Antenna (Multi-Band) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Fixed Mast Antenna (Care) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Audio Players CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Phone Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Introduction
Infotainment
If the vehicle came without a radio, the wiring provisions for a radio and an antenna were installed at the assembly plant, so that if you want, a radio can be installed at the dealer.
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features.
{ WARNING
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others. Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving.
This system provides access to many audio and non-audio listings.
7-2 Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, do the following while the vehicle is parked:
. Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system.
. Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on page 93.
Notice: Contact your dealer before adding any equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could interfere with the operation of the engine, radio, or other systems, and could damage them. Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone equipment.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts, parking brake, and other functions of the vehicle operate through the radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment is added to the vehicle, the chimes may not work. Make sure that replacement or additional equipment is compatible with the vehicle before installing it. See Accessories and Modifications on page 103.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 919 for more information.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
The theft-deterrent feature works by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) to the infotainment system. The infotainment system does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
Operation
Infotainment System 7-3
AM-FM Radio
7-4 Infotainment System
Radio with CD (MP3) Shown; Radio with USB and CD (MP3) and Radio with CD Similar
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system.
Using the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
the system on and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume.
4 (Information): Press to switch
the display between the radio station frequency and the time. While the ignition is off, press this button to display the time. Press to
display additional text information related to the current FM-RDS station or MP3 song. A choice of additional information such as Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) can display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab, or press the softkey located under any one of the tabs and the information about that tab displays.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with SCV automatically adjust the radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle speed changes while driving, so that the volume level stays consistent.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM (automatic volume) tab on the radio display.
Infotainment System 7-5
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select the level of radio volume compensation. The display times out after approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) (AM-FM Radio and AM-FM Radio with CD)
To adjust the bass or treble:
1. Press the f knob until Bass or
Treble displays.
2. To adjust the setting, do one of the following:
. Turn the f knob.
. Press either ¨ SEEK, or © SEEK.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music. Selecting MANUAL, or changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
Setting the Tone (Bass/ Midrange/Treble) (All Except AM-FM Radio and AM-FM Radio with CD)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To adjust the bass, midrange, or treble:
1. Press the f knob until the tone
control tabs display.
2. Highlight the desired tone control tab by doing one of the following:
. Press the f knob.
. Press the softkey under the desired tab.
3. Adjust the setting by doing one of the following:
. Turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise.
. Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.
. Press \ FWD or s REV.
If a station's frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle position, press the softkey positioned under the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press the f knob for more
than two seconds until a beep sounds.
7-6 Infotainment System
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music. Selecting MANUAL, or changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ settings are either MANUAL or TALK.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) (AM-FM Radio and AM-FM Radio with CD)
To adjust the balance or fade:
1. Press ` or press the f knob
until the speaker control tab displays.
2. To adjust the setting, do one of the following:
. Turn the f knob.
. Press either ¨ SEEK, or © SEEK.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) (All Except AM-FM Radio and AM-FM Radio with CD)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance or fade:
1. Press the f knob until the
speaker control tabs display.
2. Highlight the desired speaker control tab by doing one of the following:
. Press the f knob.
. Press the softkey under the desired tab.
3. Adjust the setting by doing one of the following:
. Turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise.
. Press ¨ SEEK or © SEEK.
. Press \ FWD or s REV.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the middle position,
press the f knob for more than
two seconds.
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radio disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer for service.
VIN or NO VIN: One of these messages will display when the TheftLock system has locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer.
Infotainment System 7-7
Radio
AM-FM Radio
Radio Data System (RDS)
The Radio may have a Radio Data System (RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, and XM. The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the station frequency.
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press © SEEK to go to the previous or ¨ SEEK to go to the next station
and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either button for two seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next station. For AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD, the station frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan mode. Press either button again to stop scanning.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
For AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD, scan presets within the current selected band by pressing and holding either SEEK button for four seconds until a double beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset, plays for a few seconds if a
strong signal is present, then goes to the next stored preset. The station frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan mode.
Setting Preset Stations
If the radio does not have a FAV button, up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on the six numbered softkeys, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered softkeys for three seconds until a beep sounds. When that softkey is pressed and released, the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each softkey.
7-8 Infotainment System
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving on page 93.
FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle has a FAV button, a maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six softkeys positioned below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM and FM stations.
The balance/fade and tone settings that were previously adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep sounds. When that softkey is pressed and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each softkey radio station you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be set up using the MENU button. To set up the number of favorites pages:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the softkey located below the displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency tabs and to begin the process of programming your favorites for the chosen number of numbered pages.
Infotainment System 7-9
Satellite Radio
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XMTM stations while the radio is in the XM mode.
XM is a satellite radio service based in the United States and Canada only.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, and XM. The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the station frequency.
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press © SEEK to go to the previous or ¨ SEEK to go to the next station
and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either button for two seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next station. For AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD, the station frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan mode. Press either button again to stop scanning.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
For AM-FM Radio and Radio with CD, scan presets within the current selected band by pressing and holding either SEEK button for four seconds until a double beep sounds. The radio goes to a stored preset, plays for a few seconds if a strong signal is present, then goes to the next stored preset. The station frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan mode.
Setting Preset Stations
If the radio does not have a FAV button, up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be programmed on the six numbered softkeys, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered softkeys for three seconds until a beep sounds. When that softkey is pressed and released, the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each softkey.
7-10 Infotainment System
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving on page 93.
FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle has a FAV button, a maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six softkeys positioned below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM and FM stations.
The balance/fade and tone settings that were previously adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep sounds. When that softkey is pressed and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each softkey radio station you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be set up using the MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu.
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the softkey located below the displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency tabs and to begin the process of programming your favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages.
Infotainment System 7-11
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce these levels during the night. Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach only about 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the radio. This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone's battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
Fixed Mast Antenna (Multi-Band)
The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle. The antenna is used for OnStar and the XM Satellite Radio Service System
if the vehicle has these features. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for clear reception. Make sure there is sufficient clearance when entering garages or parking structures.
Fixed Mast Antenna (Care)
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged as long as it is securely attached to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Make sure there is sufficient clearance when entering garages or parking structures.
Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten by hand.
7-12 Infotainment System
Audio Players
CD Player
Care of the CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caught in the CD. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD player, use only CDs in good condition without any label, load one CD at a time, and keep
the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see "CD Player Messages" later in this section.
Care of CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, clean it with a soft, lint-free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with water. Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
Inserting a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
Ejecting a CD (Single CD Player)
Z EJECT: Press and release to
eject the disc. Remove the CD when Remove Disc displays. If the disc is not removed, after several seconds the disc is automatically pulled back into the player.
Infotainment System 7-13
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays on the left side of the radio display. As each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to cycle between CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message showing the disc and/or track number will display when a CD is in the player. Press again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device; see Auxiliary Devices on page 717 for more information. If a
portable audio player is not connected, "No Input Device Found" displays.
4 (Information): Press to display
additional text information related to the current song. If information is available, the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line. When information is not available, NO INFO displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on
the CD that is currently playing.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start
of the current track if more than 10 seconds on the CD have played.
Press to go to the previous track if less than 10 seconds on the CD have played.
Press and hold, or press multiple times, to continue moving backward through the tracks on the CD.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
track.
Press and hold, or press multiple times, to continue moving forward through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press
and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback quickly within a track.
RDM (Random): Press to listen to tracks in random, rather than sequential order. To use random, do one of the following:
For the AM-FM Radio with CD:
1. Press the RDM button until the random icon displays.
2. Press the RDM button again until the random icon disappears from the display.
7-14 Infotainment System
For the Radio with CD (MP3) and Radio with USB and CD (MP3):
1. Press the softkey positioned under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays.
2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.
MP3-Supported Files
The Radio with CD (MP3) and Radio with USB and CD (MP3) have the capability of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.
Format
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma files that were recorded onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
The radio can play discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files. If both formats are on the disc, the radio reads all MP3 files first, then the uncompressed CD audio files.
CD-R- or CD-RW-Supported File and Folder Structure
The radio supports:
. Up to 50 folders.
. Up to eight folders in depth.
. Up to 50 playlists.
. Up to 255 files.
. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored in the root directory when the disc or storage device does not contain folders.
Files accessed from the root directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.
Empty Folder
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the player advances to the next folder that contains files.
Order of Play
Compressed audio files are accessed in the following order:
. Playlists (Px).
. Files stored in the root directory.
. Files stored in folders in the root directory.
Tracks are played in the following order:
. Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist has played, play continues from the first track of the first playlist.
Infotainment System 7-15
. Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder. When the last track of the last folder has played, play continues from the first track of the first folder.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened. The display does not show parts of words on the last page of text, and the extension of the file name is not displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
CDs that have preprogrammed playlists created using WinAmpTM, MusicMatchTM, or Real JukeboxTM software can be accessed; however,
there is no playlist-editing capability using the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio with a USB port.
Playlists can be changed by using
the softkeys below the S c and c T tabs, the f knob, the © SEEK button, or the ¨ SEEK
button. An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that has been recorded without using file folders can be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files, the player allows access and navigates up to the maximum, but all items over the maximum are not accessible.
Playing an MP3
4 (Information): Press to display
additional text information related to the current song. If information is available, the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line. When information is not available, NO INFO displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3s on
the CD currently playing.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the track, if more than 10 seconds have played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Release s REV to resume playing.
7-16 Infotainment System
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the
file displays. Release \ FWD to
resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey below the S c tab to
go to the first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below the c T tab to go to
the first track in the next folder.
RDM (Random): Press to listen to tracks in random, rather than sequential order. To use random, do one of the following:
For the Radio with CD (MP3) and Radio with USB and CD (MP3):
1. Press the softkey positioned under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays.
2. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below the h tab to play
the files in order by artist or album.
The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of files on the disc. The radio may begin playing while it is scanning in the background.
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display. Once all songs by that artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the desired artist displays.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album:
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the Album tab from the sort screen.
3. Press the softkey below the Back tab to return to the main music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the second line between the arrows, and songs from the current album begin to play. Once all songs from that album have played, the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD and begins playing MP3s from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
Infotainment System 7-17
CD Player Messages
CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or the CD ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:
. It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play.
. The road is very rough. When the road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
. The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again.
. There was a problem while burning the CD.
. The label is caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.
Auxiliary Devices
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Radios with an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate can connect to an external audio device such as an iPod®, MP3 player, or CD player, for use as another source for audio listening. This input jack is not an audio output; do not plug headphones into the front auxiliary input jack.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving on page 93 for more information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.
For optimal sound quality, increase the portable audio device's volume to the loudest level.
It is always best to power the portable audio device through its own battery while playing.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player. Additional volume adjustments might have to be made from the portable device if the volume is not loud or soft enough.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing. The portable audio device continues playing.
7-18 Infotainment System
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a portable audio device is playing. Press again and the system begins playing audio from the connected portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, "No Input Device Found" displays.
Using the USB Port
Radios with a USB port can control a USB storage device or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs. See "Playing an MP3" in CD Player on page 712 for information about how to connect and control a USB storage device or an iPod.
USB Support
The USB connector is located on the instrument panel and uses the USB 2.0 standard. USB-Supported Devices . USB flash drive . Portable USB hard drive . Fifth generation or later iPod . iPod nano . iPod touch . iPod classic
Not all iPods and USB drives are compatible with the USB port.
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple® for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated using the latest iTunes® application. See www.apple.com/itunes.
For help with identifying the iPod, go to www.apple.com/support.
Radios that have a USB port can play .mp3 and .wma files that are stored on a USB storage device as well as AAC files that are stored on an iPod.
USB-Supported File and Folder Structure
The radio supports:
. Up to 700 folders.
. Up to eight folders in depth.
. Up to 65,535 files.
. Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
Infotainment System 7-19
. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
. AAC files stored on an iPod.
. FAT16.
. FAT32.
Connecting a USB Storage Device or iPod
The USB port can be used to control an iPod or a USB storage device.
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device to the USB port located on the instrument panel.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable that came with the iPod to the iPod's dock connector and connect the other end to the USB port located on the instrument panel. If the vehicle is on
and the USB connection works, "OK to disconnect" and a GM logo may appear on the iPod, and iPod appears on the radio display. The iPod music appears on the radio display and begins playing.
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle if the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod automatically powers off and will not charge or draw power from the vehicle's battery.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it can still be used by connecting it to the auxiliary input jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. See "Using the Auxiliary Input Jack" earlier for more information.
Using the Radio to Control a USB Storage Device or iPod
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod using the radio buttons and knobs, and display song information on the radio display.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the track, if more than 10 seconds have played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
track. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release s REV to resume playing.
The elapsed time of the file displays.
7-20 Infotainment System
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback quickly. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release \ FWD
to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays.
4 (Information): Press to display
additional information about the selected track.
Using Softkeys to Control a USB Storage Device or iPod
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to control the functions listed below.
To use the softkeys:
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio display to display the functions listed below, or press the softkey below the function if it is currently displayed.
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function on it to use that function.
j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the track.
The tab appears raised when pause is being used. Press the softkey
below j again to resume playback.
Back: Press the softkey below the Back tab to go back to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root directory on a USB storage device.
c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view the
contents of the current folder on the USB drive. To browse and select files:
1. Press the softkey below c.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list
of folders.
3. Press f to select the desired
folder. If there is more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the desired folder is reached.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files
in the selected folder.
5. Press f to select the desired file
to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order:
. First softkey, first item in the list.
. Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the softkey is pressed.
. Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the softkey is pressed.
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the softkey is pressed.
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Infotainment System 7-21
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h to view and
select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's menu system. Files are sorted by:
. Playlists
. Artists
. Albums
. Genres
. Songs
. Composers
To select files:
1. Press the softkey below h.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list
of menus.
3. Press f to select the
desired menu.
4. Turn f to scroll through the
folders or files in the selected menu.
5. Press f to select the desired file
to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order:
. First softkey, first item in the list.
. Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the softkey is pressed.
. Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the softkey is pressed.
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the softkey is pressed.
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Repeat Functionality
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below " or '
to select between Repeat All and Repeat Track.
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat all tracks. The
tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used. This is the default mode when a USB storage device or iPod is first connected.
' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' to repeat one
track. The tab appears raised when Repeat Track is being used.
7-22 Infotainment System
Shuffle Functionality
To use Shuffle:
Press the softkey below >, 2, C, or = to select between
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
> (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to turn shuffle
off. This is the default mode when a USB storage device or iPod is first connected.
2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle
Songs): Press the softkey below
= or C to shuffle all songs on
the USB storage device or iPod.
C (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > to shuffle all
songs in the current album on an iPod.
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to shuffle all
songs in the current folder on a USB storage device.
Phone
Bluetooth
For vehicles equipped with Bluetooth capability, the system can interact with many cell phones, allowing:
. Placement and receipt of calls in a hands-free mode.
. Sharing of the cell phone's address book or contact list with the vehicle.
To minimize driver distraction, before driving, and with the vehicle parked:
. Become familiar with the features of the cell phone. Organize the phone book and contact lists clearly and delete duplicate or rarely used entries. If possible, program speed dial or other shortcuts.
. Review the controls and operation of the infotainment system.
. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. The system may not work with all cell phones. See "Pairing" in this section for more information.
. If the cell phone has voice dialing capability, learn to use that feature to access the address book or contact list. See "Voice Pass-Thru" in this section for more information.
. See "Storing and Deleting Phone Numbers" in this section for more information.
{ WARNING
When using a cell phone, it can be distracting to look too long or too often at the screen of the phone or the infotainment (navigation) system. Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Focus your attention on driving.
Infotainment System 7-23
A Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth-capable cell phone with a Hands-Free Profile to make and receive phone calls. The system can be used while the key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for more information on compatible phones.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
For additional information, say "Help" while you are in a voice recognition menu.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice.
Audio System
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound comes through the vehicle's front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level. The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Steering Wheel Controls on page 52 for more information.
b / g (Mute/Push To Talk): Press
to answer incoming calls, confirm system information, and start speech recognition.
c / x (End): Press to end a call,
reject a call, or cancel an operation.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the Bluetooth system and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone manufacturer's user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not connected, calls will be made using OnStar Hands-Free Calling, if equipped. See OnStar Overview on page 141 for more information.
7-24 Infotainment System
Pairing Information
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3 capability cannot be paired to the vehicle as a phone and an MP3 player at the same time.
. Up to five cell phones can be paired to the Bluetooth system.
. The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving.
. Pairing only needs to be completed once, unless the pairing information on the cell phone changes or the cell phone is deleted from the system.
. Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the Bluetooth system at a time.
. If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the first available paired cell phone in the order that they were first paired to the system. To connect to a different paired phone, see "Connecting to a Different Phone" later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say "Bluetooth." This command can be skipped.
3. Say "Pair." The system responds with instructions and a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
4. Start the pairing process on the cell phone that you want to pair. For help with this process, see the cell phone manufacturer's user guide.
5. Locate the device named "Your Vehicle" in the list on the cell phone. Follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the PIN provided in Step 3. After the PIN is successfully entered, the system prompts you to provide a name for the paired cell phone. This name will be used to indicate which phones are paired and connected to the vehicle. The system responds
with "<phone name> has been successfully paired" after the pairing process is complete.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair additional phones.
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
The system can list all cell phones paired to it. If a paired cell phone is also connected to the vehicle, the system responds with "is connected" after that phone name.
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say "Bluetooth."
3. Say "List."
Deleting a Paired Phone
If the phone name you want to delete is unknown, see "Listing All Paired and Connected Phones."
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say "Bluetooth."
Infotainment System 7-25
3. Say "Delete." The system asks which phone to delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you want to delete.
Connecting to a Different Phone
To connect to a different cell phone, the Bluetooth system looks for the next available cell phone in the order in which all the available cell phones were paired. Depending on which cell phone you want to connect to, you may have to use this command several times.
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say "Bluetooth."
3. Say "Change phone."
. If another cell phone is found, the response will be "<Phone name> is now connected."
. If another cell phone is not found, the original phone remains connected.
Storing and Deleting Phone Numbers
The system can store up to 30 phone numbers as name tags in the Hands-Free Directory that is shared between the Bluetooth and OnStar systems, if equipped.
The following commands are used to delete and store phone numbers.
Store: This command will store a phone number, or a group of numbers as a name tag.
Digit Store: This command allows a phone number to be stored as a name tag by entering the digits one at a time.
Delete: This command is used to delete individual name tags.
Delete All Name Tags: This command deletes all stored name tags in the Hands-Free Calling Directory and the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory, if equipped.
Using the "Store" Command
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say "Store."
3. Say the phone number or group of numbers you want to store all at once with no pauses, then follow the directions given by the system to save a name tag for this number.
Using the "Digit Store" Command
If an unwanted number is recognized by the system, say "Clear" at any time to clear the last number.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system, say "Verify" at any time.
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say "Digit Store."
7-26 Infotainment System
3. Say each digit, one at a time, that you want to store. After each digit is entered, the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone. After the last digit has been entered, say "Store," and then follow the directions given by the system to save a name tag for this number.
Using the "Delete" Command
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say "Delete."
3. Say the name tag you want to delete.
Using the "Delete All Name Tags" Command
This command deletes all stored name tags in the Hands-Free Calling Directory and the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory, if equipped.
To delete all name tags:
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say "Delete all name tags."
Listing Stored Numbers
The list command will list all stored numbers and name tags.
Using the "List" Command
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say "Directory."
3. Say "Hands-Free Calling."
4. Say "List."
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands.
Dial or Call: The dial or call command can be used interchangeably to dial a phone number or a stored name tag.
Digit Dial: This command allows a phone number to be dialed by entering the digits one at a time.
Re-dial: This command is used to dial the last number used on the cell phone.
Using the "Dial" or "Call" Command
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say "Dial" or "Call."
3. Say the entire number without pausing, or say the name tag.
Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers.
Using the "Digit Dial" Command
The digit dial command allows a phone number to be dialed by entering the digits one at a time. After each digit is entered, the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Infotainment System 7-27
If an unwanted number is recognized by the system, say "Clear" at any time to clear the last number.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system, say "Verify" at any time.
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say "Digit Dial."
3. Say each digit, one at a time, that you want to dial. After each digit is entered, the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone. After the last digit has been entered, say "Dial."
Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers.
Using the "Re-dial" Command
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. After the tone, say "Re-dial."
Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
. Press b / g to answer the call.
. Press c / x to ignore a call.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier.
. Press b / g to answer an
incoming call when another call is active. The original call is placed on hold.
. Press b / g again to return to
the original call.
. To ignore the incoming call, no action is required.
. Press c / x to disconnect the
current call and switch to the call on hold.
7-28 Infotainment System
Three-Way Calling
Three-way calling must be supported on the cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier.
1. While on a call, press b / g.
2. Say "Three-way call."
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected,
press b / g to link all callers
together.
Ending a Call
Press c / x to end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be muted so that the person on the other end of the call cannot hear them.
. To mute a call, press b / g, and
then say "Mute call."
. To cancel mute, press b / g,
and then say "Un-mute call."
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
The cell phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred. The connection process can take up to two minutes after the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Transferring Audio from the Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press b / g.
2. Say "Transfer Call."
Transferring Audio to the Bluetooth System from a Cell Phone
During a call with the audio on the
cell phone, press b / g. The audio
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio does not transfer to the vehicle, use the audio transfer feature on the cell phone. See your cell phone manufacturer's user guide for more information.
Infotainment System 7-29
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice pass-thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone. See your cell phone manufacturer's user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature.
To access contacts stored in the cell phone:
1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
2. Say "Bluetooth." This command can be skipped.
3. Say "Voice." The system responds "OK, accessing <phone name>."
The cell phone's normal prompt messages will go through their cycle according to the phone's operating instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tones
The Bluetooth system can send numbers and the numbers stored as name tags during a call. You can use this feature when calling a menu-driven phone system. Account numbers can also be stored for use.
Sending a Number or Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b / g. The system
responds "Ready," followed by a tone.
2. Say "Dial."
3. Say the number or name tag to send.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This includes all saved name tags in the phone book and phone pairing information. For information on how to delete this information, see the previous section "Deleting a Paired Phone" and the previous sections on deleting name tags.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 1316 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
7-30 Infotainment System
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls
Climate Control Systems Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Rear Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Climate Control Systems
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with this system.
Vehicles without Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
9 (Fan Control): Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
9 (Off): Turns the system off.
Temperature Control: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
8-2 Climate Controls
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to change the current airflow mode.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and floor outlets, with some air directed toward the windshield.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield and side windows.
- (Defog): This mode clears the
windows of fog or moisture. Outside air is directed to the floor and defroster outlets. Adjust the temperature knob for warmer or cooler air. The air conditioning compressor might turn on in this setting to dehumidify the air.
1 (Defrost): This mode clears
the windshield of fog or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield, with some to the floor outlets and front side windows. The air conditioning compressor might turn on in this setting to dehumidify the air.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Climate Controls 8-3
Vehicles with Air Conditioning
A. Fan Control
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
D. Rear Window Defogger
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time needed for the vehicle to cool down and the system operates more efficiently.
# (Air Conditioning): Cools and
dehumidifies the air inside of the vehicle.
V (Maximum Air Conditioning):
Cools the air inside the vehicle faster, by recirculating the inside air.
Rear Window Defogger
For vehicles with a rear window defogger, a warming grid is used to remove fog or frost from the rear window.
It only works when the ignition is in ON/RUN.
1 (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger turns off several minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the defogger will run for several more minutes before turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine.
8-4 Climate Controls
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Rear Heating System
For vehicles with a rear heating system, it lets you adjust the amount of air flowing into the rear of the vehicle, from the front-seating area. This feature works with the main climate-control system in the vehicle.
AUX: The thumbwheel for this system is located in the instrument panel switchbank below the audio system.
9 (Fan): Turn the thumbwheel up
or down to increase or decrease the amount of heated air sent to the rear-seating area.
Q (High): This position supplies
the most amount of heat to the rear-seating area.
c (Medium): This position
supplies half the amount of heat to the rear-seating area.
R (Low): This position supplies
the least amount of heat to the rear-seating area.
9 (Off): Turns the rear heating
system off.
Rear Climate Control System
For vehicles with a rear heating and air-conditioning system, it controls the temperature, fan speed and air delivery for the rear-seat passengers only. The front climate control panel is located in the overhead console between the driver and front passenger.
Climate Controls 8-5
When the fan knob is in the AUX position, the rear climate control panel can be used to adjust the climate settings in the rear seating area.
Front Climate Control Panel
A. Fan Control B. Air Delivery Mode Control C. Temperature Control
Use this control panel to maintain a separate temperature setting. Adjust the direction of the airflow or adjust the fan speed for the rear seat passenger(s).
8-6 Climate Controls
Rear Climate Control Panel
A. Fan Control
B. Air Delivery Mode Control
C. Temperature Control
For vehicles with a rear climate control panel, it is located overhead behind the driver and front passenger, centered in front of the second row. To adjust the rear climate control panel settings by a rear seat passenger, the front climate control panel fan knob must
be in the AUX position. The fan speed, air delivery mode, and temperature can then be adjusted.
AUX (Auxiliary): Turn the fan knob on the front climate control panel to AUX to let rear seat passengers use the control panel in the rear seating area. This disables the front control panel. To return control to the front panel, move the fan knob out of AUX.
9 : Turns the system off.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed in the rear-seating area.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature in the rear-seating area.
The air-conditioning system on the main climate control panel must be turned on to direct cooled air to the rear of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the temperature in the rear of the vehicle remains at cabin temperature.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow in the rear seating area.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the
upper outlets, with some directed to the floor outlets.
2 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
Be sure to keep the area under the front seats clear of any objects so that the air inside of the vehicle can circulate effectively.
For information on how to use the main climate control system, see Climate Control Systems on page 81. For information on ventilation, see Air Vents on page 87.
Air Vents
Use the outlets located near the center and on the sides of the instrument panel to change the direction of airflow.
Operation Tips
. Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that may block the flow of air into the vehicle.
. Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system.
. Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively.
Climate Controls 8-7
8-8 Climate Controls
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Operating
Driving Information Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Starting and Operating New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Engine Exhaust Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission (Six Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 Automatic Transmission (Four Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Drive Systems All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Brakes Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Ride Control Systems StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Cruise Control Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Fuel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Gasoline Specifications (U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 California Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-39 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-40 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41 Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Towing General Towing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
9-2 Driving and Operating
Driving Information
Distracted Driving
Distraction comes in many forms and can take your focus from the task of driving. Exercise good judgment and do not let other activities divert your attention away from the road. Many local governments have enacted laws regarding driver distraction. Become familiar with the local laws in your area.
To avoid distracted driving, always keep your eyes on the road, hands on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
. Do not use a phone in demanding driving situations. Use a hands-free method to place or receive necessary phone calls.
. Watch the road. Do not read, take notes, or look up information on phones or other electronic devices.
. Designate a front seat passenger to handle potential distractions.
. Become familiar with vehicle features before driving, such as programming favorite radio stations and adjusting climate control and seat settings. Program all trip information into any navigation device prior to driving.
. Wait until the vehicle is parked to retrieve items that have fallen to the floor.
. Stop or park the vehicle to tend to children.
. Keep pets in an appropriate carrier or restraint.
. Avoid stressful conversations while driving, whether with a passenger or on a cell phone.
{ WARNING
Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Focus your attention on driving.
Refer to the infotainment section for more information on using that system, including pairing and using a cell phone.
If equipped, refer to the navigation manual for information on that system, including pairing and using a cell phone.
Driving and Operating 9-3
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means "always expect the unexpected." The first step in driving defensively is to wear the safety belt. See Safety Belts on page 38.
. Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be ready.
. Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you.
. Focus on the task of driving.
Drunk Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy.
{ WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking, steering, and accelerating are important factors in helping to control a vehicle while driving.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average driver reaction time is about three-fourths of a second. In that time, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), which could be a lot of distance in an emergency.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind include:
. Keep enough distance between you and the vehicle in front of you.
. Avoid needless heavy braking.
. Keep pace with traffic.
9-4 Driving and Operating
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. Doing so could make the pedal harder to push down. If the engine stops, there will be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Steering
Hydraulic Power Steering
Your vehicle has hydraulic power steering. It may require maintenance. See Power Steering Fluid Power Steering Fluid on page 1023.
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the power steering system is not functioning, the vehicle can be steered but may required increased effort. See your dealer if there is a problem.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the hybrid supplement for more information.
Curve Tips
. Take curves at a reasonable speed.
. Reduce speed before entering a curve.
. Maintain a reasonable steady speed through the curve
. Wait until the vehicle is out of the curve before accelerating gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
. There are some situations when steering around a problem may be more effective than braking.
. Holding both sides of the steering wheel allows you to turn 180 degrees without removing a hand.
. Antilock Brake System (ABS) allows steering while braking.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Follow these tips: 1. Ease off the accelerator and
then, if there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle so that it straddles the edge of the pavement.
Driving and Operating 9-5
2. Turn the steering wheel about one-eighth of a turn, until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
3. Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Loss of Control
Skidding
There are three types of skids that correspond to the vehicle's three control systems:
. Braking Skid -- wheels are not rolling.
. Steering or Cornering Skid -- too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
. Acceleration Skid -- too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible.
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow these suggestions:
. Ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. The vehicle may straighten out. Be ready for a second skid if it occurs.
. Slow down and adjust your driving according to weather conditions. Stopping distance can be longer and vehicle control can be affected when traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other material on the road. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface -- and slow down when you have any doubt.
. Try to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the braking skid.
9-6 Driving and Operating
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water.
{ WARNING
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause the vehicle to be carried away. If this
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under the vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When the vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include:
. Allow extra following distance.
. Pass with caution.
. Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
. Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
. Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page 1046.
. Turn off cruise control.
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe place to park the vehicle and rest.
Other driving tips include:
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
. Keep the interior temperature cool.
. Keep your eyes moving -- scan the road ahead and to the sides.
. Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in these conditions include:
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
. Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission.
. Shift to a lower gear when going down steep or long hills.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 9-7
WARNING (Continued)
none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
{ WARNING
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
. Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
. Be alert on top of hills, something could be in your lane (stalled car, accident).
. Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand.
9-8 Driving and Operating
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 931 improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be a serious situation. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible, use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 136. To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
. Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
{ WARNING
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe and/or the fuel operated heater exhaust system, if equipped. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and a fuel operated heater, see "Fuel Operated Heater (FOH)" in the diesel engine supplement.
. Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there.
. Open a window about 5 cm (2 in) on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 9-9
WARNING (Continued)
. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.
. Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See Climate Control Systems in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust on page 922.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under the vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in the vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of the vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat. Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
If the Vehicle Is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's traction system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the rocking method.
{ WARNING
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 55 km/h (35 mph).
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 1067.
9-10 Driving and Operating
Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing the Vehicle on page 1085.
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how much weight the vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on the vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued) vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also shorten the life of the vehicle. Tire and Loading Information Label
Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver door
Driving and Operating 9-11
open, you will find the label attached below the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 1046 and Tire Pressure on page 1054.
There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
the front and rear axle. See "Certification/Tire Label" later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. See Trailer Towing on page 947 for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and trailering tips.
9-12 Driving and Operating
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg (300 lbs)
C. Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs)
Example 2
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg (750 lbs)
C. Available Cargo Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs)
Example 3
A. Maximum Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
C. Available Cargo Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs)
Refer to the vehicle tire and loading information label for specific information about the vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions.
Driving and Operating 9-13
The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label
A vehicle specific Certification/ Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver door. The label shows the size of the vehicle's original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity
of the vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on the front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh the vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out the load equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for the vehicle, or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
If there is a heavy load, it should be spread out.
{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also shorten the life of the vehicle.
9-14 Driving and Operating
{ WARNING
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
. Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
. Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.
. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
. When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
. Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to.
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put a limit on how many people you carry inside the vehicle. Be sure to weigh the vehicle before you buy and install the new equipment.
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:
. Keep the vehicle speed at 88 km/h (55 mph) or less for the first 805 km (500 miles).
. Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 805 km (500 miles). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
. Avoid making hard stops for the first 322 km (200 miles) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings.
. Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Trailer Towing on page 947 for the trailer towing capabilities of the vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be gradually increased.
Driving and Operating 9-15
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has four different positions. To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal applied. A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is stopped, turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 919.
This position locks the ignition and transmission.
Do not turn the engine off when the vehicle is moving. This will cause a loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags.
If the vehicle must be shut off in an emergency:
1. Brake using a firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes repeatedly. This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). This can be done while the vehicle is moving. After shifting to N (Neutral), firmly apply the brakes and steer the vehicle to a safe location.
9-16 Driving and Operating
3. Come to a complete stop, shift to P (Park), and turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 932.
{ WARNING
Turning off the vehicle while moving may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. While driving, only shut the vehicle off in an emergency.
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, and must be shut off while driving, turn the ignition to ACC/ ACCESSORY.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the position in which you can operate things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off.
C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights. This position can also be used for service and diagnostics, and to verify the proper operation of the malfunction indicator lamp as may be required
for emission inspection purposes. The switch stays in this position when the engine is running.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
D (START): This is the position that starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
Starting the Engine
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
To place the transmission in the proper gear:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not start in any other position. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts.
Driving and Operating 9-17
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking System. This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components. If the ignition key is turned to the START position, and then released when the engine begins cranking, the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the key is held in START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running. Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/ OFF position.
When the Low Fuel warning lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL LOW message is displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC), the Computer-Controlled
Cranking System is disabled to prevent possible vehicle component damage. When this happens, hold the ignition switch in the START position to continue engine cranking.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below -18°C or 0°F), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to 15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down.
9-18 Driving and Operating
When the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you do not, the engine might not perform properly. Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Fast Idle System
If the vehicle has this feature it is available only with cruise control. The manual fast idle switch is operated using the cruise control buttons located on the left hand side of the steering wheel.
This system can be used to increase engine idle speed whenever the following conditions are met:
. The park brake is set.
. The brake pedal is not pressed.
. The vehicle must not be moving and the accelerator must not be pressed.
To control the fast idle:
. To enable the Fast Idle System, press and release the Cruise Control On/Off button and ensure that the switch LED is lit.
. Press and release the Cruise Control Set switch. Engine speed will be held at approximately 1200 RPM.
When the fast idle is active the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display "FAST IDLE ON."
One of the following actions will turn off the fast idle:
. Pressing the brake.
. Selecting the Cruise Control Cancel button.
. Releasing the Parking Brake.
. The transmission shift lever is moved out of P (Park) or N (Neutral).
. Selecting the Cruise Control On/Off button when it was previously on.
. Pressing the Cruise Control Set switch a second time.
. Pressing the accelerator greater than a quarter of the down.
. Turning the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
Driving and Operating 9-19
Engine Heater
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold weather conditions at or below -18°C (0°F). Vehicles with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above -18°C (0°F).
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord for the engine coolant heater is located on the driver side of the engine compartment and is attached to the hose for the power steering reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{ WARNING
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts and prevent damage.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
. Audio System
. Power Windows (if equipped)
These features will work when the ignition key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, power to the radio and power windows will continue to work 10 minutes or until the driver door is opened.
9-20 Driving and Operating
Shifting Into Park
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 943.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 932.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from P (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the vehicle into P (Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P (Park). This is called torque lock. To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver seat. To find out how, see "Shifting Into Park" previously in this section.
Driving and Operating 9-21
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
Shifting out of Park
The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully apply the brakes before you can shift from P (Park) when the ignition is in ON/ RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. See Automatic Transmission (Six Speed) on page 923 or Automatic Transmission (Four Speed) on page 927.
The shift lock control system is designed to do the following:
. Prevent the ignition key from being removed unless the shift lever is in P (Park).
. Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock control system is always functional except in the case of a dead battery or low voltage (less than 9 V) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting on page 1080 for more information.
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition to ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, push the shift lever all the way into P (Park).
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, have the vehicle serviced.
9-22 Driving and Operating
Parking over Things That Burn
{ WARNING
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
{ WARNING
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
. The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
. The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different.
. The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage.
. The vehicle exhaust system has been modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
. There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or aftermarket modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
. Drive it only with the windows completely down.
. Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation.
Driving and Operating 9-23
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{ WARNING
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see Engine Exhaust on page 922.
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park on page 920.
If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 943.
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission (Six Speed)
Vehicles with a six speed automatic transmission have a shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster. There are several different positions for the shift lever.
See "Range Selection Mode" under Manual Mode on page 929.
9-24 Driving and Operating
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the best position to use when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily. When parked on a hill, especially when the vehicle has a heavy load, you might notice an increase in the effort to shift out of P (Park). See "Torque Lock" under Shifting Into Park on page 920 for more information.
{ WARNING
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground,
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park on page 920. If you are pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 943.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 99.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
{ WARNING
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Driving and Operating 9-25
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides the best fuel economy. If you need more power for passing, and you are:
. Going less than about 55 km/h (35 mph), push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or more, push the accelerator all the way down.
By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the next gear and has more power.
D (Drive) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load or driving on steep hills. You might want to shift the transmission to a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding. See "Skidding" under Loss of Control on page 95.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed to determine, before making an upshift, if the engine is able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed, throttle position, and vehicle load. If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained, the transmission does not upshift and instead holds the current gear. In some cases, this could appear to be a delayed shift, however the transmission is operating normally.
The transmission uses adaptive shift controls. Adaptive shift controls continually compares key shift parameters to pre-programmed ideal shifts stored in the transmissions computer. The
transmission constantly makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance according to how the vehicle is being used, such as with a heavy load or when temperature changes. During this adaptive shift control process, shifting might feel different as the transmission determines the best settings.
The shift quality of a new vehicle may not be ideal because the Adaptive Shift Control process may not have determined the best settings for a particular shift or condition. Shift quality will improve with continued driving.
When temperatures are very cold, the transmission's gear shifting could be delayed providing more stable shifts until the engine warms up. Shifts could be more noticeable with a cold transmission. This difference in shifting is normal.
9-26 Driving and Operating
M (Manual Mode): This position lets drivers select the range of gears appropriate for current driving conditions. If the vehicle has this feature, see "Range Selection Mode" under Manual Mode on page 929.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving. It reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive) without using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads, when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears and when going down a steep hill. See "Range Selection Mode" under Manual Mode on page 929.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use the brakes off and on. See "Range Selection Mode" under Manual Mode on page 929.
If you manually select 2 (Second) in an automatic transmission, the transmission will start in second gear. You can use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start the vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed without using the brakes. You can use it for major/ severe downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate
due to steepness of grade. When you shift to 1 (First) it provides the lowest gear appropriate to current road speed and continues to downshift as the vehicle slows, eventually downshifting to 1 (First) gear. The transmission can be held in 1 (First) gear using Range Selection Mode or the shift lever. See "Range Selection Mode" under Manual Mode on page 929.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Driving and Operating 9-27
Automatic Transmission (Four Speed)
There are several different positions for your shift lever. P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the best position to use when you start the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily.
{ WARNING
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park on page 920. If you are pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 943.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. You must first press the brake pedal before you can shift from P (Park) with the ignition in ON/RUN.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting out of Park on page 921.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging the transmission, see If the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 99.
9-28 Driving and Operating
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
{ WARNING
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides the best fuel economy. If you need more power for passing, and you are:
. Going less than about 55 km/h (35 mph), push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or more, push the accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding. See "Skidding" under Loss of Control on page 95.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving. However it reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive) without using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads, when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears and when going down a steep hill.
You should use 3 (Third) (or a lower gear as needed) when towing a trailer to minimize heat build-up and extend the life of the transmission.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use the brakes off and on.
You may use this feature for reducing torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start the vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
1 (First): This position reduces vehicle speed even more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmission will not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Driving and Operating 9-29
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Manual Mode
Range Selection Mode
The vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode. The Range Selection Mode helps control the vehicle's transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range of gears.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever to M (Manual Mode).
2. Press the +/- buttons, located on the steering column shift lever, to select the desired range of gears for current driving conditions.
When M (Manual Mode) is selected a number displays in the DIC next to the M indicating the current gear.
This number is the highest gear that can be used. However, the vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions. This means that all gears below that number are available. When 5 (Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until the +/- button located on the steering column lever is used to change to the gear.
Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 930.
While using Range Selection Mode, Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul Mode can be used.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Low Traction Mode
Low Traction Mode can assist in vehicle acceleration when road conditions are slippery. While the vehicle is at a stop, select the second gear range using Range Selection Mode. This will limit torque to the wheels after it detects wheel slip, preventing the tires from spinning.
9-30 Driving and Operating
Tow/Haul Mode
Vehicles with an automatic transmission have a Tow/Haul Mode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycling, providing increased performance, vehicle control, and transmission cooling when towing or hauling heavy loads.
Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and off by pressing the button, located to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. When Tow/ Haul is on, a light on the instrument panel cluster will come on.
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 524 for more information.
Also see "Tow/Haul Mode" under Towing Equipment on page 952 for more information.
Grade Braking (Six Speed Automatic Transmission)
The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by pressing the Tow/ Haul button on the instrument panel. While in Range Selection Mode, Grade Braking is deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range of gears.
Grade Braking is only active while the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and you are not in the Range Selection Mode. See "Tow/Haul Mode" listed previously and Manual Mode on page 929 for more information on the Range Selection Mode. Grade Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades by automatically shifting to lower gears when the driver desires to slow the vehicle by applying the brake. This reduces wear on the braking system and increases control of the vehicle.
Also see Trailer Towing on page 947 for more information.
Driving and Operating 9-31
Drive Systems
Brakes
All-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels when extra traction is needed. This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If driving safely on a wet road and it becomes necessary to slam on the brakes and continue braking to avoid a sudden obstacle, a computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as required, faster than any driver could. This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 524.
9-32 Driving and Operating
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let ABS work. You might hear the ABS pump or motor operating and feel the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than even the very best braking.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal, then push down the parking brake pedal. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down. Pull the handle, located just above the parking brake pedal, with the parking brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released, the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 943.
Driving and Operating 9-33
Ride Control Systems
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer controlled system that assists the driver with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle's brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path.
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt while it is working. This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle. The
system should initialize before the vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph). In some cases, it may take approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of driving before the system initializes.
The Traction Control System (TCS)/ StabiliTrak indicator light comes on the instrument panel cluster when the system requires service. When StabiliTrak activates, the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator light flashes on the instrument panel. This also occurs when TCS is activated. For more information, see Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on page 525. For your safety, the system can only be disabled when the vehicle speed is less than 32 km/h (20 mph).
Press the StabiliTrak button located on the instrument panel once to turn off the Traction Control System (TCS). The appropriate message is displayed in the DIC.
Press and hold the StabiliTrak button for more than five seconds to turn off StabiliTrak and TCS.
9-34 Driving and Operating
The StabiliTrak Off light illuminates and the appropriate messages will be displayed in the DIC.
To turn on the StabiliTrak system back on, press the StabiliTrak button again. StabiliTrak will automatically turn back on when the vehicle speed exceeds 32 km/h (20 mph).
When the StabiliTrak system has been turned off, system noises may still be heard as a result of the brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to "rock" the vehicle to attempt to free it. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 99.
StabiliTrak System Operation
The StabiliTrak system is normally on, except when the system is initializing or has been disabled with the StabiliTrak button. The StabiliTrak system will automatically activate to assist the driver in maintaining vehicle directional control in most driving conditions. When activated, the StabiliTrak system may reduce engine power to the wheels and apply braking to individual wheels as necessary to assist the driver with vehicle directional control. If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates, the cruise control automatically disengages. The cruise control can be re-engaged when road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 935.
The StabiliTrak system may also turn off automatically if it determines that a problem exists with the system. If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle, see your dealer for service.
Traction Control Operation
TCS is part of the StabiliTrak system. TCS limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels and by applying brakes to each individual wheel as necessary .
If the brake-traction control system activates constantly or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed braking, the brake-traction control will be automatically disabled. The system will come back on after the brakes have cooled. This can take up to two minutes or longer depending on brake usage.
TCS may activate on dry or rough roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When this a reduction in acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration may be heard. This is normal.
Driving and Operating 9-35
Adding non-dealer accessories can affect the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 103 for more information.
Locking Rear Axle
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction on snow, mud, ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low, this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle.
Cruise Control
{ WARNING
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and the system begins to limit wheel spin, cruise control will automatically disengage. See StabiliTrak® System on page 933. When road conditions allow the cruise control to be safely used again, it can be turned back on.
For vehicles with cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
When the brakes are applied, cruise control is turned off.
I (On/Off): Press to turn the
system on or off. The indicator light
is on when cruise control is on and
turns off when cruise control is off.
9-36 Driving and Operating
+RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press briefly to make the vehicle resume to a previously set speed, or press and hold to accelerate.
SET- (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or press and hold to decelerate.
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
If the cruise button is on when not in use, it could get bumped and go into cruise when not desired. Keep the cruise control switch off when cruise is not being used.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster comes on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed.
1. Press the I button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET- button located on the steering wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press the +RES button on the steering wheel. The vehicle returns to the previous set speed and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is already activated,
. Press and hold the +RES button on the steering wheel until the desired speed is reached, then release it.
. To increase vehicle speed in small amounts, press the +RES button. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Driving and Operating 9-37
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is already activated,
. Press and hold the SET button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it.
. To slow down in small amounts, press the SET button on the steering wheel briefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends on the vehicle speed, the load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep
hills, pressing the accelerator pedal may be necessary to maintain vehicle speed.
While going downhill:
. Vehicles with a four speed automatic transmission may need to have the brakes applied or the transmission shifted to a lower gear to keep the speed down.
. Vehicles with a six speed automatic transmission have a Cruise Grade Braking feature that may automatically shift to a lower gear to keep the speed down. It may be necessary to apply the brake or manually shift the transmission to a lower gear. The vehicle may shift to a higher gear when grade braking assistance is no longer required. Cruise Grade Braking is not available while in Range Selection Mode. This feature is active when the exhaust brake
is enabled (if equipped). See "Range Selection Mode" under Manual Mode on page 929.
When the brakes are manually applied the cruise control is disengaged.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
. To disengage cruise control, step lightly on the brake pedal.
. Press the [ on the steering
wheel.
. To turn off the cruise control,
press I on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory if I is
pressed or if the vehicle is turned off.
9-38 Driving and Operating
Fuel
For diesel engine vehicles, see "Fuel for Diesel Engines" in the Duramax Diesel Supplement.
For Vehicles with gasoline engines, please read this.
Gasoline
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance, we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards developed by auto companies. A list of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at www.toptiergas.com.
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge and a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 940. For all other vehicles, use only the unleaded gasoline described under Recommended Fuel on page 938.
Recommended Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, an audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications (U.S. and Canada Only)
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See Fuel Additives on page 939 for additional information.
Driving and Operating 9-39
California Fuel Requirements
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. See the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California Emissions Standards, the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 520. If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving.
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing the emission control system to work properly. In most cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
regulations. To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean and avoid problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards developed by the auto companies. A list of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at www.toptiergas.com.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by General Motors. It is available at your dealer.
9-40 Driving and Operating
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing more than 15% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce spark plug life and affect emission control system performance. The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs, return to your dealer for service.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge and a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). For all other vehicles, use only the unleaded gasoline described under Recommended Fuel on page 938.
We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a "renewable" fuel, meaning it is made from renewable sources such as corn and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump available. The U.S. Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/ locator/stations/) that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85%.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification D 5798 or CGSB Specification 3.512. Filling the tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM or CGSB specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on. As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors should supply winter grade ethanol, the same as with unleaded gasoline.
Driving and Operating 9-41
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible -- do not add less than 11 L (3 gal) when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 11 km (7 mi) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.
E85 has less energy per liter (gallon) than gasoline, so you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the Tank on page 941.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle's fuel system. Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused by additives would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty.
Filling the Tank
{ WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle.
If the vehicle has E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be yellow and state that E85 or gasoline can be used. See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 940.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
9-42 Driving and Operating
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door.
{ WARNING
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Exterior Care on page 1088.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 520.
{ WARNING
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 520.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{ WARNING
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
. Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
. Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete.
. Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
. Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel.
Driving and Operating 9-43
Towing
General Towing Information
Only use towing equipment that has been designed for the vehicle. Contact your dealer or trailering dealer for assistance with preparing the vehicle for towing a trailer.
See the following trailer towing information in this section:
. For information on driving while towing a trailer, see "Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips."
. For maximum vehicle and trailer weights, see "Trailer Towing."
. For information on equipment to tow a trailer, see "Towing Equipment."
For information on towing a disabled vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on page 1085. For information on towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as a motor home, see Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 1085.
Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips
Pulling a Trailer
Here are some important points:
. There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure the rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you will be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police.
. Consider using a sway control. See "Hitches" in Towing Equipment on page 952.
. Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 800 km (500 mi) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
9-44 Driving and Operating
. Then, during the first 800 km (500 mi) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
. Vehicles with an automatic transmissions can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
. The weight of the trailer.
. The weight of the trailer tongue.
. The weight on the vehicle's tires.
Also see "Tow/Haul Mode" later in this section for information about the Tow/Haul button and the Tow/Haul indicator light.
Driving with a Trailer
{ WARNING
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
. Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting a trip.
. Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window open.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.
. Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust on page 922.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
Driving and Operating 9-45
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This checks the electrical connection at the same time.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer. Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
9-46 Driving and Operating
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while parked, preferably on level ground, with the automatic transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine Overheating on page 1021.
Parking on Hills
{ WARNING
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous. If something goes wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a flat surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift the transmission into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the brake pedal until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
Driving and Operating 9-47
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
1.1. Start the engine.
1.2. Shift into a gear.
1.3. Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer. See this manual's Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Trailer Towing
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax® diesel supplement for more information.
{ WARNING
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well -- or even at all. The driver and passengers could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this section and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the information in "Weight of the Trailer" that appears later in this section.
9-48 Driving and Operating
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature, and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See "Weight of the Trailer Tongue" later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers,and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Driving and Operating 9-49
Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
G1500 Cargo Van 2WD
4.3L V6
3.42
5.3L V8
3.42 3.73
H1500 Cargo Van AWD
5.3L V8
3.42
G1500 Passenger Van 2WD
5.3L V8
3.42 3.73
H1500 Passenger Van AWD
5.3L V8
3.42 3.73
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
4.8L V8
3.42
6.0L V8
3.42
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
1 950 kg (4,300 lbs) 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs)
4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
2 948 kg (6,500 lbs)
5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
2 812 kg (6,200 lbs)
5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
2 722 kg (6,000 lbs)
3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
9-50 Driving and Operating
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
G2500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
4.8L V8
3.42
3 266 kg (7,200 lbs)
5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8
3.42
4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G2500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
4.8L V8
3.42
3 039 kg (6,700 lbs)
5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8
3.42
4 445 kg (9,800 lbs)
7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
4.8L V8
3.42
3 357 kg (7,400 lbs)
5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8
3.42
4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G3500 Cargo Van 2WD Long Wheelbase 4.8L V8
3.42
3 221 kg (7,100 lbs)
5 897 kg (13,000 lbs)
6.0L V8
3.42
4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Short Wheelbase
6.0L V8
3.42
4 400 kg (9,700 lbs)
7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
G3500 Passenger Van 2WD Long Wheelbase
6.0L V8
3.42
4 218 kg (9,300 lbs)
7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
*The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo equipment and conversion. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.
Driving and Operating 9-51
Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 133 for more information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment, passengers, or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910 for more information about the vehicle's maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a maximum of 181 kg (400 lbs) with a weight carrying hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a maximum of 454 kg (1,000 lbs) with a weight distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch
ball closest to the vehicle. This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle's ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight.
It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings -- GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.
9-52 Driving and Operating
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires
Be sure the vehicle tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver door, or see Vehicle Load Limits on page 910. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue. If using a weight distributing hitch, make sure not to go over the rear axle limit before applying the weight distribution spring bars.
Towing Equipment
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches
A. Body to Ground Distance B. Front of Vehicle When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle. If a step-bumper hitch will be used, the bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there
is ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper.
If the loaded trailer being pulled will weigh more than 2 270 kg (5,000 lbs), be sure to use a properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these limits. Ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Will any holes need to be made in the body of the vehicle when a trailer hitch is installed?
If using the wiring provided with the factory-installed trailering package, no holes need to be made in the body of the vehicle. However, if an aftermarket hitch is installed, holes may need to be made in the body.
Driving and Operating 9-53
If holes are made in the body, then be sure to seal the holes later when the hitch is removed. If the holes are not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the engine's exhaust can get into the vehicle as well as dirt and water. See "Carbon Monoxide" under Engine Exhaust on page 922.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 680 kg (1,500 lbs) needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The optional heavy-duty trailer wiring package includes a wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector at the rear of the vehicle and a four-wire harness assembly under the driver side of the instrument panel. The four-wire harness assembly comes without a connector.
If the vehicle does not have a trailer hitch, the seven-wire harness assembly with connector is taped together and located in a frame pocket at the driver side rear left corner of the frame.
If the vehicle has a trailer hitch, the seven-wire harness assembly with connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch platform. In both cases, the seven-wire harness has a connector and includes a 30-amp feed wire.
The seven-wire harness connector contains the following trailer circuits:
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps (10A fuse)**
. White: Ground
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal
. Dark Green: Right Rear Stop and Turn Signal*
. Red/Black Stripe: Battery Feed (30A Fuse)
. Brown: Trailer Park Lamp Supply Voltage (15A fuse)**
. Yellow: Left Rear Stop and Turn Signal *
9-54 Driving and Operating
The four-wire harness (without connector) contains the following circuits:
. Black: Ground
. Red/White: Battery Feed
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal
. Light Blue: CHMSL/Stoplamp Supply Voltage
* If the vehicle is a cutaway with trailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse will be shared for both left/stop trailer turn and right/stop trailer turn signals. However, the cutaway lighting connector will have a 10 amp fuse for each signal.
** If the vehicle is a cutaway with trailer provisions, a 15 amp fuse will be shared for trailer park lamps and cutaway rear lighting connector park lamps. Also, a 10 amp fuse will be shared for trailer back-up lamps and cutaway rear lighting connector back-up lamps.
Tow/Haul Mode This button is on the instrument panel, to the right of the steering wheel. Pressing this button turns on and off the Tow/Haul Mode.
This indicator light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode is on. Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 930 for more information.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See "Weight of the Trailer" in Trailer Towing on page 947. Tow/Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions:
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain.
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic.
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired.
Driving and Operating 9-55
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However, there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/ Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 332 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 333.
9-56 Driving and Operating
2 NOTES
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care
General Information General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Vehicle Checks Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9 Automatic Transmission Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-21 Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-23 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-30 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-31 Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-32 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Bulb Replacement Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-37 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-38 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Electrical System Electrical System Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Floor Console Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Wheels and Tires Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-47 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
10-2 Vehicle Care
Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-66 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Secondary Latch System . . . 10-78 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-80
Jump Starting Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Towing Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-85 Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Appearance Care Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals.
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be necessary. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.
Accessories and Modifications
Adding non-dealer accessories or making modifications to the vehicle can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. These accessories or modifications could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components resulting from modifications or the installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including control module or software modifications, is not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. See your dealer to accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories installed by a dealer technician.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 333.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ WARNING
You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it.
. Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts, and tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task.
. Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other fasteners. Metric and English fasteners can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are used, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 1312.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 332.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. See Maintenance Records on page 1115.
Hood
To open the hood:
1. Pull the handle with this symbol on it. It is located in front of the driver side door frame near the floor.
Vehicle Care 10-5
If the vehicle has an underhood lamp, it will automatically come on and stay on until the hood is closed.
Before closing the hood, be sure all of the filler caps are on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer. Let the hood down and close it firmly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and lift up the secondary hood release, which is located underneath the middle of the hood.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood.
10-6 Vehicle Care Engine Compartment Overview
4.3L V6 Engine Shown (4.8L V8 Engine, 5.3L V8 Engine and 6.0L V8 Engine Similar)
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Battery on page 1028.
B. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 1017.
C. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System on page 1017.
D. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See "Checking the Fluid Level" under Automatic Transmission Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on page 1010 or Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) on page 1013.
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See "When to Add Engine Oil" under Engine Oil on page 107.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See "Checking Engine Oil" under Engine Oil on page 107.
G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 1016.
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid on page 1023.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Brake Fluid on page 1026.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See "Adding Washer Fluid" under Washer Fluid on page 1024.
Engine Oil
For diesel engine vehicles, see "Engine Oil" in the Duramax Diesel Supplement.
To ensure proper engine performance and long life, careful attention must be paid to engine oil. Following these simple, but important steps will help protect your investment:
. Always use engine oil approved to the proper specification and of the proper viscosity grade. See "Selecting the Right Engine Oil" in this section.
. Check the engine oil level regularly and maintain the proper oil level. See "Checking Engine Oil" and "When to Add Engine Oil" in this section.
. Change the engine oil at the appropriate time. See Engine Oil Life System on page 109.
. Always dispose of engine oil properly. See "What to Do with Used Oil" in this section.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 106 for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Obtaining an accurate oil level reading is essential:
1. If the engine has been running recently, turn off the engine and allow several minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
10-8 Vehicle Care
Checking the oil level too soon after engine shutoff will not provide an accurate oil level reading. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil and then recheck the level. See "Selecting the Right Engine Oil" in this section for an explanation of what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on page 122.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. Oil levels above or below the acceptable operating range shown on the dipstick are harmful to the engine. If you find that you have an oil level above the operating range, i.e., the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged. You should drain out the excess oil or limit driving of the vehicle and seek a service professional to remove the excess amount of oil.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 106 for the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through.
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112.
Specification
Use and ask for licensed engine oils with the dexos1TM approved certification mark. Engine oils meeting the requirements for the vehicle should have the dexos1 approved certification mark. This certification mark indicates that the oil has been approved to the dexos1 specification.
Notice: Failure to use the recommended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the
Vehicle Care 10-9
vehicle warranty. Check with your dealer or service provider on whether the oil is approved to the dexos1 specification.
Viscosity Grade
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity grade for the vehicle. Do not use other viscosity grade oils such as SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29°C), an SAE 0W-30 oil should be used. An oil of this viscosity grade will provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures. When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade, always select an oil that meets the dexos1 specification or equivalent. See "Specification" for more information.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the dexos specification and displaying the
dexos certification mark are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash or pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on a combination of factors which include engine revolutions, engine temperature, and miles driven. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on. See Engine Oil Messages on page 535. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
10-10 Vehicle Care
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might indicate that an oil change is not necessary for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and, at this time, the system must be reset. Your dealer has trained service people who will perform this work and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System
Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. To reset the system:
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (4-Speed Transmission)
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Maintenance Schedule on page 113 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112.
How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, it may be decided to have this done at the dealer.
If not taken to the dealer, be sure to follow all the instructions here or a false reading on the dipstick could result.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
Vehicle Care 10-11
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if checking the transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
. When outside temperatures are above 32°C (90°F).
. At high speed for quite a while.
. In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
. While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C (180°F to 200°F).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 24 km (15 mi) when outside temperatures are above 10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third)
until the engine temperature gauge moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off, but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 10°C (50°F) or more. If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), the engine may have to idle longer. Should the fluid level be low during this cold check, the fluid must be checked hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will give a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in P (Park).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick is located near the center of the engine compartment and will be labeled with the graphic shown. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 106 for more information. 1. Flip the handle up and then pull
out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
10-12 Vehicle Care
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area for a cold check or in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid
Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112 to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use.
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does not take much fluid, generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112.
. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under "How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid," earlier in this section.
. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
Vehicle Care 10-13
Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission)
When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak or overheating the transmission. If a small leak is suspected, use the following procedures to check the fluid level. However, if there is a large leak, then it may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealer and have it repaired before driving the vehicle further.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Maintenance Schedule on page 113, and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112.
How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be difficult, it is recommended to have this check done at the dealer, which can monitor the transmission temperature. The transmission fluid level increases with temperature. To obtain a highly accurate fluid level check, the transmission temperature must be measured.
If it is decided to check the fluid level, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or a false reading on the dipstick may occur.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if checking the transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes with the engine Off, before checking the transmission fluid level if the vehicle has been driven:
. In hot weather, when outside temperatures are above 32°C (90°F).
. The vehicle is heavily loaded.
. At high speed for quite a while in hot weather.
. In heavy traffic and hot weather.
. While pulling a trailer.
After driving under these conditions, a hot check can be performed. The fluid should be Hot, which is 71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).
A cold fluid level check can be performed after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off, but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures is between 15°C to 32°C (60°F to 90°F).
10-14 Vehicle Care
Should the fluid level be low during this cold check, the fluid must be checked Warm or Hot before adding fluid. If the outside temperature is colder than 15°C (60°F) or hotter than 32°C (90°F), a cold check cannot be performed.
A warm fluid level check can be performed by driving the vehicle under lightly loaded conditions and outside temperatures between 10°C to 27°C (50°F to 80°F). The vehicle should be driven for at least 24 km (15 mi) before performing a warm check. Checking the fluid Warm or Hot will give a more accurate reading of the fluid level than a cold check.
Because the vehicle is equipped with a high-efficiency air-to-oil cooler, the transmission fluid temperature may not reach the required Hot fluid level checking temperature under normal lightly loaded driving vehicle conditions.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in P (Park).
3. With foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. When M is reached, move the selector from M1 through M3. Then, position the shift lever in P (Park).
4. Let the engine run at idle for two minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine:
The transmission dipstick is located near the center of the engine compartment and will be labeled with the graphic shown. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 106 for more information on location. 1. Flip the handle up and then pull
out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again.
Vehicle Care 10-15
A. COLD Range
B. WARM Range
C. HOT Range
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD (A) range for a cold check, transmission temperature 27°C to 32°C (80°F to 90°F), between the COLD (A) and HOT (C) range for a WARM (B) check, 50°C to 60°C (122°F to 140°F) or in the HOT (C) cross-hatched range for a hot check, 71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F). Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112 to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use.
A. WARM Range B. HOT Range Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is warm or hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid level is low, add only enough of
the proper fluid to bring the level up to the middle of the WARM (A) or HOT (B) range depending on the ambient temperature and prior driving conditions. Refer to "How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid", earlier in this section for instructions on driving to achieve warm or hot transmission fluid. It does not take much fluid, generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112.
. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under "How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid," earlier in this section.
10-16 Vehicle Care
. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located near the center of the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 106 for more information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the scheduled maintenance intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi) interval. See Maintenance Schedule on page 113 for more information. If driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains covered with dirt, a new filter is required. Never use compressed air to clean the filter.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the following:
1. Unhook the retainer clips and remove the cover.
2. Lift the filter out of the engine air cleaner/filter housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
3. Clean the engine air cleaner/ filter housing.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. Make sure that the filter fits properly into the housing.
5. Reinstall the cover and fasten the retaining clips.
{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when working on the engine and do not drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily get into the engine, which could damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature.
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View)
{ WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan can start even when the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any engine cooling fan.
Vehicle Care 10-17
{ WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
10-18 Vehicle Care
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for 5 years or 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 1021.
What to Use
{ WARNING
Adding only plain water or some other liquid to the cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water and other liquids, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. The coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else needs to be added. This mixture:
. Gives freezing protection down to -37°C (-34°F), outside temperature.
. Gives boiling protection up to 129°C (265°F), engine temperature.
. Protects against rust and corrosion.
. Will not damage aluminum parts.
. Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle cooling system, the vehicle could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112 for more information.
Vehicle Care 10-19
Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, or into sewers, streams, or bodies of water. Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center, familiar with legal requirements regarding used coolant disposal. This will help protect the environment and your health.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank. If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the COLD FILL mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done.
The coolant recovery tank cap has this symbol on it.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at or above the COLD FILL mark. If it is not, there could be a leak in the cooling system.
If the coolant is low, add the coolant or take the vehicle to a dealer for service.
How to Add Coolant to the Recovery Tank for Gasoline Engines
{ WARNING
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
10-20 Vehicle Care
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
{ WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
WARNING (Continued)
cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
If coolant is needed, add the proper mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done.
If a hiss is heard, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
{ WARNING
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
(Continued)
1. Remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. Do not press down while turning the pressure cap.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112 for more information about the proper coolant mixture.
Vehicle Care 10-21
4. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLD FILL mark.
5. Reinstall the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run until the upper radiator hose can be felt getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.
8. Replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
Engine Overheating
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
The vehicle has an indicator to warn of engine overheating.
There is an engine coolant temperature gauge on the vehicle's instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 515 for more information.
10-22 Vehicle Care
If the decision is made not to lift the hood when this warning appears, but instead get service help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 136.
If the decision is made to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it does not, the vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire because of being driven with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
If Steam is Coming from the Engine Compartment
{ WARNING
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop the
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
If No Steam is Coming from the Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle:
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
. Stops after high-speed driving.
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
. Tows a trailer. See "Driving on Grades" under Trailer Towing on page 947.
Vehicle Care 10-23
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance from the vehicle in front. If the warning does not come back on, continue to drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you are parked. If the warning is still on, turn off the engine until it cools down.
If the decision is made not to lift the hood, get service help right away.
Engine Fan
The vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages, so an increase in fan noise may be heard. This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch partially disengages. This fan noise may be heard when starting the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially disengages.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment on the driver side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 106 for reservoir location.
10-24 Vehicle Care
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless there is a leak suspected in the system or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Notice: Extremely small amounts of contamination can cause steering system damage and cause it to not work properly. Do not allow contaminants to contact the fluid side of the reservoir cap/dipstick or from entering the reservoir.
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the COLD FILL mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
To prevent contamination of brake fluid, never check or fill the power steering reservoir with the brake master cylinder cover off.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Washer Fluid
What to Use When the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If operating the vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 106 for reservoir location.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Notice
. When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer's instructions for adding water.
. Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water does not clean as well as washer fluid.
. Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.
. Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the windshield washer system and paint.
Brakes
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
{ WARNING
The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to a crash. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 122.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
10-26 Vehicle Care
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts. When parts of the braking system are replaced, be sure to get new, approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might not work properly. For example, installing disc brake pads that are wrong for the vehicle, can change the balance between the front and rear brakes -- for the worse. The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed.
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 106 for the location of the reservoir. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down: . The brake fluid level goes down
because of normal brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up. . A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{ WARNING
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the engine and/or fuel operated heater parts, if equipped. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and a fuel operated heater, see "Fuel Operated Heater (FOH)" in the diesel engine supplement. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and the vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. See "Checking Brake Fluid" in this section.
Vehicle Care 10-27
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check the brake fluid. See Maintenance Schedule on page 113. Checking Brake Fluid Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 106.
The fluid level should be above MIN. If it is not, have the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{ WARNING
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system, the brakes might not work well. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice
. Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
. If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Battery
Refer to the replacement number shown on the original battery label when a new battery is needed. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 106 for battery location.
{ WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
{ WARNING
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
page 1080 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
All-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See Maintenance Schedule on page 113.
How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface.
A. Drain Plug B. Fill Plug If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug hole, located on the transfer case, some lubricant will need to be added. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fill plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112 to determine what kind of lubricant to use.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See Maintenance Schedule on page 113.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug hole, some lubricant may need to be added.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level to 10 mm (3/8 in) below the fill plug hole.
Vehicle Care 10-29
When the differential is at operating temperature (warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fill plug hole.
What to Use Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112 to determine what kind of lubricant to use.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule on page 113 to determine how often to check the lubricant.
10-30 Vehicle Care
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If you have the 1500 Series, the proper level is from 15 mm (5/8 in) to 40 mm (1 5/8 in) below the bottom of the fill plug hole. The proper level for the 2500 and 3500 Series is from 0 to 6 mm (1/4 in) below the bottom of the fill plug hole. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
What to Use
Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112 to determine what kind of lubricant to use.
Noise Control System
The following information relates to compliance with federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs). The Maintenance Schedule provides information on maintaining the noise control system to minimize degradation of the noise emission control system during the life of the vehicle. The noise control system warranty is given in the vehicle warranty booklet.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the United States.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof:
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control, prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below.
Insulation:
. Removal of the noise shields or any underhood insulation.
Engine:
. Removal or rendering engine speed governor, if the vehicle has one, inoperative so as to allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer specifications.
Fan and Drive:
. Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one, or rendering clutch inoperative.
. Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle has one.
Air Intake:
. Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
. Modification of the air cleaner.
Exhaust:
. Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
. Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe clamps.
Fuel Operated Heater (FOH) -- Diesel Engine:
. Removal of the muffler.
Starter Switch Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 932.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Vehicle Care 10-31
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 932.
10-32 Vehicle Care
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition on, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
. The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever is in P (Park).
. The ignition key should come out only in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.
. To check the parking brake's holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
. To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is required.
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear and cracking. See Maintenance Schedule on page 113 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For proper type and length, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 1114.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
Vehicle Care 10-33
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield. 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the
windshield.
A. Wiper Arm B. Release Lever C. Blade Assembly 2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hook and push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade assembly (C). 3. Push the new blade assembly securely on the wiper arm until the release lever clicks into place.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 1038.
For any bulb-changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ WARNING
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
Composite Headlamp
A. High-Beam Headlamp B. Low-Beam Headlamp To remove the headlamp assembly from the vehicle and access the bulbs: 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 104 for more information.
10-34 Vehicle Care
To prevent headlamp vibration and shortened bulb life, be sure to insert the headlamp assembly tabs in the slots at the lower portion of the housing.
Sealed-Beam Headlamp
2. Remove the two bolts from the headlamp assembly.
3. Lift the headlamp assembly to release the lower tabs from the radiator support.
4. Turn the headlamp forward and upward to remove it from the grille.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Turn the bulb counterclockwise one quarter turn to remove it from the headlamp assembly.
7. Install the new bulb into the headlamp assembly and connect the electrical connector.
8. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp assembly.
A. Headlamp retainer screws
B. Headlamp retainer
C. Sealed-beam headlamp bulb
1. Remove the four screws (A) from the headlamp retainer (B).
Pull the retainer (B) out and set it aside.
2. Pull the bulb (C) forward to gain access to the electrical connector.
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
Vehicle Care 10-35
To replace the front turn signal, sidemarker, and/or parking lamp bulb(s):
3. Disconnect the electrical connector (B) and remove the headlamp bulb (A).
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the headlamp.
A. Front Parking and Turn Signal Lamp
B. Front Sidemarker Lamp
1. Use a small tool to unlatch the outboard clip on the lamp by pushing inboard and prying the lamp assembly forward.
2. Remove the lamp from the grille.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise one quarter turn and remove it from the lamp assembly.
10-36 Vehicle Care
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling it straight out.
5. Replace the bulb.
6. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall it in the lamp assembly.
7. Reinstall the lamp assembly into the grille until the outboard clip snaps into place.
Taillamps
To replace a taillamp/turn signal lamp or back-up lamp bulb:
1. Remove the two inboard nuts from the inside of the taillamp assembly.
2. The third nut (C) is under the applique piece (B) above the lamp. Remove the two inboard applique nuts. Pull the applique (B) straight rearward slightly to clear the studs. Then rotate the applique (B) just far enough to gain access to the outer push pins (A).
3. Carefully disconnect the push pins (A) from the applique bracket
Vehicle Care 10-37
4. Remove the third nut (C) from the upper outboard side of the lamp.
5. Remove the taillamp assembly from the vehicle.
6. Remove the taillamp/turn signal lamp (A) or back-up lamp (B) bulb socket by turning it counterclockwise one quarter turn and pulling it out of the lamp assembly.
7. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
8. Push the new bulb into the socket.
9. Reinstall the bulb socket by turning it clockwise into the lamp assembly.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the taillamp assembly and applique.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) is located above the rear doors at the center of the vehicle.
To replace a bulb:
1. Remove the two screws from the CHMSL assembly.
2. Remove the CHMSL assembly.
10-38 Vehicle Care
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise one quarter turn to remove it from the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket and push the new bulb into the socket.
5. Turn the bulb socket clockwise one quarter turn to install it in the lamp assembly.
6. Reinstall the CHMSL assembly and two screws.
Do not block or damage the CHMSL when items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
A. Bulb Socket B. License Plate Bulb Assembly C. Screws 1. Remove the screws (C) that
secure the license plate bulb assembly (B). 2. Turn the bulb socket (A) counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
3. Install the new bulb.
4. Reverse steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the license plate bulb assembly.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up, Rear Parking, Stoplamp, and Turn Signal Lamp
3157KX
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
912LL
Front Parking and Turn Signal Lamp
3157KX
Front Sidemarker Lamp
194LL
License Plate Lamp
194LL
Exterior Lamp
Headlamps
Composite High-Beam Headlamp
Composite Low-Beam Headlamp
Sealed Beam Headlamp
Bulb Number
9005LL
9006LL H6054
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your dealer.
Vehicle Care 10-39
Electrical System
Electrical System Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit breakers to protect against an electrical system overload.
When the current electrical load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the current load returns to normal or the problem is fixed. This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical problems.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect power devices in the vehicle.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
If there is a problem on the road and a fuse needs to be replaced, the same amperage fuse can be borrowed. Choose some feature of the vehicle that is not needed to use and replace it as soon as possible.
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. Have the headlamp wiring checked right away if the lamps go on and off or remain off.
10-40 Vehicle Care
Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the windshield wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by an electrical problem and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The fuse block is located in the engine compartment on the driver side of the vehicle.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.
Vehicle Care 10-41
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.
Mini Fuse
Usage
3
Right Stop/Turn Trailer
4
Spare
5
Spare
Fuel System
6
Control Module
Ignition
7
Body Control Module 5
8
Body Control Module 7
9
Body Control Module 4
10
Instrument Panel Cluster
11
Trailer Wiring
12
Spare
13
Spare
10-42 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuse 14 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26
27 28
Usage
Windshield Washer
Horn
Transmission
Air Conditioning Compressor
Engine Control Module Battery
Spare
Left Stop/Turn Trailer
Spare
Spare
Fuel Pump
Auxiliary Power Outlet
Body Control Module 3
Special Equipment Option
Airbag
Mini Fuse 29 30
31
32 33 34 35 36 51 52
Usage
Steering Wheel Sensor
Engine Control Module Ignition/ Glow Plug Module
Transmission Control Module Ignition
Transmission Control Module Battery
Spare
Spare
Fuel Operated Heater Module
Fuel System Control Module Battery
Left High-Beam Headlamp
Right High-Beam Headlamp
Mini Fuse 53 54 55 56 58 59 61 62 63 64 65
Usage
Left Low-Beam Headlamp
Right Low-Beam Headlamp
Wiper
Canister Vent Solenoid
Body Control Module 2
Body Control Module 1
Spare
Oxygen Sensor 2 (Post), EV Fan (Diesel)
Spare
Mass Air Flow/ Canister Vent
Odd Ignition/ Injectors
Mini Fuse 66
67
68 69 70 71
Usage
Daytime Running Lamps 2 (LOLVL-V22) (If Equipped)
Daytime Running Lamps 1 (UPLVL+V22) (If Equipped)
Auxiliary Stop Lamps
Trailer Stop Lamps
Spare
Fuel Heater/Flex Fuel Sensor
Mini Fuse 72
73 75 76 77
78
79
Usage
Body Control Module 6
Lighter/Data Link Connection
V6 Fuel Injectors
Spare
Oxygen Sensor 2 (Pre)
Engine Control Module Powertrain
Even Ignition/ Injectors
Vehicle Care 10-43
J-Case Fuse
Usage
1
ABS Motor
2
ABS Module
41
Spare
42
Trailer Wiring
43
Fan High
44
Starter Solenoid
45
Engine Control Module/Powertrain
46
Spare
47
Fan Lo
74
Front Blower
10-44 Vehicle Care
Relay 15 37 38 39
40
48 49 50 57 60
Usage Run/Crank Spare Fuel Pump Crank Air Conditioning Compressor Fan High Powertrain Spare Fan Low Fan Control
Floor Console Fuse Block
The floor console fuse block is located under the driver seat.
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.
Mini-Fuse
Usage
F1
Empty
F2
Steering Wheel Sensor
F3
Auxiliary Parking Lamps (Cut-Away)
F4
Front Park Lamps
F5
Trailer Park Lamps
F6
Upfitter Park Lamps
F7
Right Rear Park Lamp
F8
Left Rear Park Lamp
F9
Outside Rearview Mirror Switch
F10
Airbag/Automatic Occupant Sensing
Mini-Fuse F11 F12 F13
F14 F15 F17 F18 F19 F20
F21
Usage
OnStar® (If Equipped)
Empty
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning 2
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning 1
Empty
Outside Rearview Mirror Heater
Rear Window Defogger
Compass
Radio/Chime/XMTM Satellite Radio (If Equipped)
Remote Function Actuator/Tire Pressure Monitor
Vehicle Care 10-45
Mini-Fuse
F22
F23
F25
F26 F27 F30 F31 F32 F33 F34
Usage
Ignition Switch/ Discrete Logic Ignition Sensor (PK3)
Instrument Panel Cluster
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Control
Auxiliary/Trailer Backup
Taillamps Backup
Upfitter Courtesy Lamps
Front Door Lock
Rear Door Lock
Cargo Door Unlock
Passenger Door Unlock
10-46 Vehicle Care
Mini-Fuse
F35
F36 F37 F38
Usage Rear Passenger Door Unlock Driver Door Unlock Empty Empty
J-Case Fuse
Usage
F16
Upfitter Auxiliary 1
F24
Empty
F28
Upfitter Auxiliary 2 Reading Lamps
F29
Rear Blower
Relays K1 K2
Usage
Run (High Current Micro)
Empty (High Current Micro)
Relays K3 K4 K5
K6
Usage
Park Lamps (High Current Micro)
Upfitter Auxiliary 2 (High Current Mini)
Rear Defogger (High Current Micro)
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) (High Current Micro)
Circuit Breaker
CB1
CB2
Usage
Power Seats Power Windows
Wheels and Tires
Tires
Every new GM vehicle has high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. See the warranty manual for information regarding the tire warranty and where to get service. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer.
{ WARNING
. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.
. Overloading the tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. There could be a blowout and a serious crash. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-47
WARNING (Continued)
. Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting crash could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are cold.
. Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact -- such as when hitting a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
. Worn or old tires can cause a crash. If the tread is badly worn, replace them.
. Replace any tires that have been damaged by impacts with potholes, curbs, etc.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
. Improperly repaired tires can cause a crash. Only the dealer or an authorized tire service center should repair, replace, dismount, and mount the tires.
. Do not spin the tires in excess of 55 km/h (35 mph) on slippery surfaces such as snow, mud, ice, etc. Excessive spinning may cause the tires to explode.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall. The examples show a typical passenger vehicle and light truck tire sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the "Tire Size" illustration later in this section for more detail.
10-48 Vehicle Care
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. For more information, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 1064.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Tire Pressure on page 1054 and Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire (A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the "Tire Size" illustration later in this section for more detail.
Vehicle Care 10-49
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. This does not apply to Goodyear LT225/75R16 G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225/75R16 G933 RSD commercial truck tires.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration. For information on recommended tire pressure see Tire Pressure on page 1054 andVehicle Load Limits on page 910.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single. For information on recommended tire pressure see Tire Pressure on page 1054 and Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
10-50 Vehicle Care
Tire Designations
Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load carrying capacity a tire
is certified to carry. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire (A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size mean a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
Vehicle Care 10-51
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Load Range: Load Range.
(G) Service Description: The service description indicates the load index and speed rating of a tire. If two numbers are given as in the example, 120/116, then
this represents the load index for single versus dual wheel usage (single/dual). The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load. This does not apply to Goodyear LT225/75R16 G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225/75R16 G933 RSD commercial truck tires; see the dual tire and single tire maximum load and load range letter designations on the tire sidewall.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch).
Accessory Weight: The combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
10-52 Vehicle Care
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Tire Pressure on page 1054.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
Vehicle Care 10-53
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 910 andVehicle Load Limits on page 910.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 1061.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 1064.
10-54 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated cargo load. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See "Tire and Loading Information Label" under Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively.
Notice: Neither tire underinflation nor overinflation is good. Underinflated tires, or tires that do not have enough air, can result in:
. Tire overloading and overheating which could lead to a blowout.
. Premature or irregular wear.
. Poor handling.
. Reduced fuel economy.
Overinflated tires, or tires that have too much air, can result in:
. Unusual wear.
. Poor handling.
. Rough ride.
. Needless damage from road hazards.
The Tire and Loading Information label on the vehicle indicates the original equipment tires and the correct cold tire inflation pressures. The recommended pressure is the minimum air pressure needed to support the vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight the vehicle can carry, and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label, see Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
Vehicle Care 10-55
How the vehicle is loaded affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load the vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check the tires once a month or more.
Do not forget the spare tire, if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire on page 1080 for additional information.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Proper tire inflation cannot be determined by looking at the tire. Check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold, meaning the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or no more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until the recommended pressure is reached. If the inflation pressure is high, press on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve to release air.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
Return the valve caps on the valve stems to prevent leaks and keep out dirt and moisture.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
10-56 Vehicle Care
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 1056 for additional information.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada Standards
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 1316 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire
Vehicle Care 10-57
and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument cluster. If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910. A message to check the pressure in a specific tire displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation pressure. If the vehicle has DIC buttons, tire pressure levels can be viewed. For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 527 and Tire Messages on page 539.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as the vehicle is driven. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure is getting low and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of the original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the tires when they are cold. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910, for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location. Also see Tire Pressure on page 1054.
The TPMS can warn about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection on page 1060, Tire Rotation on page 1060 and Tires on page 1046.
Notice: Tire sealant materials are not all the same. A non-approved tire sealant could damage the TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use only the GM-approved tire sealant available through your dealer or included in the vehicle.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable.
10-58 Vehicle Care
When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire pressure warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message also displays. The malfunction light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause these to come on are:
. One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off after the road tire is replaced and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.
. The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or not completed successfully after rotating the tires. The malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off after successfully completing the sensor matching process. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.
. One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See your dealer for service.
. Replacement tires or wheels do not match the original equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than those recommended could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on page 1062.
. Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition. See your dealer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message come on and stay on.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. The identification code needs to be matched to a new tire/wheel position after rotating the vehicle's tires or replacing one or more of the TPMS sensors. Also, the TPMS sensor matching process should be performed after replacing a spare tire with a road tire containing the TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off at the next ignition cycle. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, using a TPMS relearn tool, in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire, passenger
Vehicle Care 10-59
side rear tire, and driver side rear. See your dealer for service or to purchase a relearn tool.
There are two minutes to match the first tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer, the matching process stops and must be restarted.
The TPMS sensor matching process is:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter's LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen.
If the vehicle does not have RKE, press the Driver Information Center (DIC) vehicle
information button until the
PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE
POSITIONS message displays. The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen.
If the vehicle does not have RKE or DIC buttons, press the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel
cluster until the PRESS V TO
RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays. The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Place the relearn tool against the tire sidewall, near the valve stem. Then press the button to activate the TPMS sensor. A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.
10-60 Vehicle Care
Tire Inspection
We recommend that the tires, including the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, be inspected for signs of wear or damage at least once a month.
Replace the tire if:
. The indicators at three or more places around the tire can be seen.
. There is cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber.
. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
. The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
. The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See Maintenance Schedule on page 113.
Tires are rotated to achieve a uniform wear for all tires. The first rotation is the most important.
Any time unusual wear is noticed, rotate the tires as soon as possible and check the wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 1061 and Wheel Replacement on page 1066.
Use this rotation pattern when rotating the tires.
If the vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not include it in the tire rotation.
Adjust the front and rear tires to the recommended inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label after the tires have been rotated. See Tire Pressure on page 1054 and Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
Vehicle Care 10-61
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 1056.
Check that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See "Wheel Nut Torque" under Capacities and Specifications on page 122.
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.
Lightly coat the center of the wheel hub with wheel bearing grease after a wheel change or tire rotation to prevent corrosion or rust build-up. Do not get grease on the flat wheel mounting surface or on the wheel nuts or bolts.
Dual Tire Rotation
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt, or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut torque after 160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100, 1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. For proper wheel nut tightening information, see "Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire" later in this section, under If a Tire Goes Flat on page 1068. Also see "Wheel Nut Torque" under Capacities and Specifications on page 122.
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears faster than the inner tire. Tires last longer and wear
more evenly if they are rotated. See Tire Inspection on page 1060 and Tire Rotation on page 1060. Also see Maintenance Schedule on page 113.
{ WARNING
If the vehicle is operated with a tire that is underinflated, the tire can overheat. An overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch fire. You or others could be injured. Properly inflate all tires, including the spare.
See Tires on page 1046 and Tire Pressure on page 1054 for more information on proper tire inflation.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Factors such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions affect the wear rate of the tires.
10-62 Vehicle Care
Treadwear indicators are one way to tell when it is time for new tires. Treadwear indicators appear when the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or less of tread remaining.
Some commercial truck tires, including Goodyear LT225/75R16 G949 RSA and Goodyear LT225/ 75R16 G933 RSD, may not have treadwear indicators. If the tires do not have treadwear indicators, replace the tires when the tread depth is down to 3.2 mm (1/8 in) for the front tires, or 1.6 mm (1/16 in) for the rear tires. See Tire Inspection
on page 1060 and Tire Rotation on page 1060 for additional information.
The rubber in tires ages over time. This also applies to the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it is never used. Multiple conditions including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance affect how fast aging takes place. Tires will typically need to be replaced due to wear before they may need to be replaced due to age. Consult the tire manufacturer for more information on when tires should be replaced.
Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally mounted on a parked vehicle. Park a vehicle that will be stored for at least a month in a cool, dry, clean area away from direct sunlight to slow aging. This area should be free of grease, gasoline or other substances that can deteriorate rubber.
Parking for an extended period can cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while driving. When storing a vehicle for at least a month, remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce the weight from the tires.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for the vehicle. The original equipment tires installed were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. When replacement tires are needed, GM strongly recommends buying tires with the same TPC Spec rating.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of the vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC
Spec number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will be followed by MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 1047 for additional information.
GM recommends replacing all the tires at the same time. Uniform tread depth on all tires will help to maintain the performance of the vehicle. Braking and handling performance may be adversely affected if all the tires are not replaced at the same time. See Tire Inspection on page 1060 and Tire Rotation on page 1060 for information on proper tire rotation.
{ WARNING
Tires could explode during improper service. Attempting to mount or dismount a tire could cause injury or death.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-63
WARNING (Continued)
Only your dealer or authorized tire service center should mount or dismount the tires.
WARNING (Continued)
tire was developed for use on this vehicle and will not affect vehicle handling.
{ WARNING
Mixing tires of different sizes, brands, or types may cause loss of control of the vehicle, resulting in a crash or other vehicle damage. Use the correct size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
This vehicle may have a different size spare than the road tires originally installed on the vehicle. When new, the vehicle included a spare tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall diameter as the road tires and wheels, so it is all right to drive on it. The spare
(Continued)
{ WARNING
Using bias-ply tires on the vehicle may cause the wheel rim flanges to develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly and cause a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
If the vehicle tires must be replaced with a tire that does not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction (radial) as the original tires.
10-64 Vehicle Care
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 1055.
The Tire and Loading Information label indicates the original equipment tires on the vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910 for the label location and more information about the Tire and Loading Information label.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If wheels or tires are installed that are a different size than the original equipment wheels and tires, vehicle performance, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover may be affected. If the vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance of these systems can also be affected.
{ WARNING
If different sized wheels are used, there may not be an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. This increases the chance of a crash and serious injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for the vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 1062 and Accessories and Modifications on page 103 for additional information.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Vehicle Care 10-65
(UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements In Addition To These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
10-66 Vehicle Care
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels were aligned and balanced at the factory to provide the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis. However, check the alignment if there is unusual tire wear or if the vehicle is pulling to one side or the other. If the vehicle vibrates when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can be repaired. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors with new GM original equipment parts.
{ WARNING
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of the vehicle. Tires can lose air, and cause loss of control, causing a crash. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 1068 for more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ WARNING
Replacing a wheel with a used one is dangerous. How it has been used or how far it has been driven may be unknown. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. When replacing wheels, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Vehicle Care 10-67
Tire Chains
{ WARNING
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the device if it is contacting the vehicle. Do not spin the vehicle's tires. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use chains that are the proper size for the tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle. Do not use chains on the tires of the front axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage the vehicle.
For Cutaway models with LT245/ 75R16, LT225/75R16 or LT215/ 85R16 size single or dual rear tires, use Low Profile Z-Chain or SAE Class S cables.
For Cargo or Passenger models with P245/70R17, LT225/75R16 or LT245/75R16 size tires, use Low Profile Z-Chain cables. SAE Class S chains are not recommended.
If the vehicle has dual rear tires, do not use individual tire chains. Use tire chains that fit across both dual tires.
10-68 Vehicle Care
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while driving, especially if the tires are maintained properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if there ever is a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction as used in a skid. Stop pressing the accelerator pedal and steer to straighten the vehicle. It may be very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.
{ WARNING
Driving on a flat tire will cause permanent damage to the tire. Re-inflating a tire after it has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat may cause a blowout and a serious crash. Never attempt to re-inflate a tire that has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat. Have your dealer or an authorized tire service center repair or replace the flat tire as soon as possible.
{ WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place, well off the road, if possible. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 64.
{ WARNING
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall causing injury or death. Find a level place to change the tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle.
5. Place wheel blocks on both sides of the tire at the opposite corner of the tire being changed.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following example as a guide to assist in the placement of the wheel blocks (A).
A. Wheel Block B. Flat Tire The following information explains how to repair or change a tire.
Vehicle Care 10-69 Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Equipment needed for a cargo van or a passenger van is located in the passenger side rear corner of the vehicle.
Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it off of the mounting bracket. Equipment needed for a 15-passenger seating arrangement is secured on the rear floor on the passenger side of the vehicle.
10-70 Vehicle Care
To lower the spare tire from the vehicle:
Remove the retaining wing bolt and lift it out of the mounting bracket to access the equipment.
The tools you will be using include:
A. Jack
B. Jack Handle
C. Hoist Extension
D. Jack Handle Extension
E. Wheel Wrench
The spare tire is mounted in the rear underbody of the vehicle.
Use the hoist extension, jack handle extensions, and the wheel wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
A. Spare Tire B. Tire/Wheel Retainer C. Hoist Cable D. Hoist Assembly E. Hoist Shaft F. Jack Handle and Hoist
Extensions G. Wheel Wrench
Vehicle Care 10-71
1. Assemble the wheel wrench (G) to one or two of the jack handles and the hoist extensions (F).
Insert the hoist extension end through the hole in the rear bumper.
2. Be sure the hoist extension end connects to the hoist shaft. The chiseled end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 1078.
4. When the tire has been lowered, pull it closer to reach the tire retainer and pull it up through the wheel opening. For a vehicle that was completed from a cab and chassis, refer to the information from the body supplier/installer.
The spare tire is a full-size tire, like the other tires on the vehicle.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire
If the vehicle has plastic wheel nut caps, loosen them by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. The wheel nut caps are designed to remain with the center cap. Remove the center cap.
If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry it out.
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 1068 for more information.
2. Loosen all the wheel nuts with the wheel wrench. Do not remove them yet.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Rear Flat: Assemble the jack (A) together with the jack handle (B), two jack handle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
A. Jack
B. Jack Handle
C. Hoist Extension
D. Jack Handle Extension
E. Wheel Wrench
3. Assemble the jack and tools:
Front Flat: Assemble the jack (A) together with the jack handle (B), one or two jack handle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
Front Position
Front Position Rear Position
Vehicle Care 10-73
Rear Alternative Position (Diesel Vehicles)
4. Position the jack under the vehicle, as shown.
The front position jacking point is on the frame. The rear position jacking point is on the rear axle.
If the exhaust system interferes in the jack location in the rear axle, such as in Diesel vehicles, place the jack (A) on the rear axle between the axle housing and the shock absorber bracket in order to avoid any interference with the exhaust pipe (B).
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ WARNING
Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit.
10-74 Vehicle Care
6. Remove all the wheel nuts. 7. Take flat tire off of the mounting
surface.
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.
{ WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
Vehicle Care 10-75
9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each wheel nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
10. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
{ WARNING
Wheel nuts that are not tight can work loose. If all the nuts on a wheel come off, the wheel can come off the vehicle, causing a crash. All wheel nuts must be properly tightened. Follow the rules in this section to be sure they are.
{ WARNING
If wheel studs are damaged, they can break. If all the studs on a wheel broke, the wheel could come off and cause a crash. If any stud is damaged because of a loose-running wheel, it could
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
be that all of the studs are damaged. To be sure, replace all studs on the wheel. If the stud holes in a wheel have become larger, the wheel could collapse in operation. Replace any wheel if its stud holes have become larger or distorted in any way. Inspect hubs and hub-piloted wheels for damage. Because of loose running wheels, piloting pad damage may occur and require replacement of the entire hub, for proper centering of the wheels. When replacing studs, hubs, wheel nuts or wheels, be sure to use GM original equipment parts.
10-76 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing. Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on page 122 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 122 for the wheel nut torque specification.
12. Put the wheel cover or the center cap and plastic wheel nut caps back on. Remove any wheel blocks.
Have a technician check the wheel nut tightness of all wheels with a torque wrench after the first 160 km (100 mi) and then 1600 km (1,000 mi) after that. Repeat this service whenever a tire is removed or serviced. See Capacities and Specifications on page 122 for more information.
11. Use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts firmly. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise and in a crisscross sequence, as shown.
Vehicle Care 10-77
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
{ WARNING
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down.
2. Pull the retaining bar through the center of the wheel, making sure it is properly attached.
3. Pull the wheel toward the rear of the vehicle, keeping the cable tight.
4. Put the chisel end of the hoist extension on an angle through the hole in the rear door frame, above the bumper.
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until the tire is secure
and the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. Two clicks mean the the tire is up all the way.
7. Return the jacking equipment to the proper location. Secure the items and replace the jack cover.
10-78 Vehicle Care
Secondary Latch System
This vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off the vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down.
See "Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools" under Tire Changing on page 1069 for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly.
{ WARNING
Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions. Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the instructions listed next.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
{ WARNING
Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely, make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from under the spare.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is visible.
If the cable is not visible, start this procedure at Step 6.
2. Turn the hoist extension counterclockwise until approximately 15 cm (6 in) of cable is exposed.
Vehicle Care 10-79
3. Attach the jack handle/jack handle extension and wheel wrench to the jack.
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the
spare tire and turn the handle clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the secondary latch spring.
5. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place. This lets you know that the secondary latch has released. The spare tire is now balancing on the jack.
6. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable.
7. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, assembly the wheel wrench onto the hoist extension and insert the chisel end of the hoist extension into the hoist shaft hole above the bumper.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest of the way.
8. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled, you could damage the vehicle. Always reinstall this cable before driving the vehicle.
9. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can. You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
10-80 Vehicle Care
To continue changing the flat tire, return to Step 4 of "Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools" under Tire Changing on page 1069.
Full-Size Spare Tire
This vehicle, when new, may have had a fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation pressure regularly. See Tire Pressure on page 1054 and Vehicle Load Limits on page 910 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading the vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install or store a spare tire, see "Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire" and "Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools" under Tire Changing on page 1069.
After installing the spare tire on the vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well at speeds up to 112 km/h (70 mph) at the recommended inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed back onto the vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be available in case you need it again. Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because they will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.
Jump Starting
For more information about the vehicle battery, see Battery on page 1028.
If the vehicle battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{ WARNING
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:
. They contain acid that can burn you.
. They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
. They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.
Vehicle Care 10-81
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: Only use a vehicle that has a 12-volt system with a negative ground for jump starting. If the other vehicle does not have a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you do not want. You would not be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If any accessories are left on or plugged in during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Whenever possible, turn off or unplug all accessories on either vehicle when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save the radio!
10-82 Vehicle Care
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and negative (-) terminal locations of the other vehicle.
On your van, use the unpainted radio antenna bracket as a remote negative (-) terminal.
{ WARNING
Using an open flame near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.
{ WARNING
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to an unpainted metal part or to a remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one. On your van, use the unpainted radio antenna bracket as a remote negative (-) terminal.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Vehicle Care 10-83
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (-) cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (-) terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery. On your van, use the unpainted radio antenna bracket as a remote negative (-) terminal.
8. Connect the other end of the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal location on
the vehicle with the dead battery. On your van, use the unpainted radio antenna bracket as a remote negative (-) terminal.
Notice: Your vehicle uses the unpainted radio antenna bracket as a remote negative (-) terminal. Move the antenna coax cable out of the way before clamping the negative jumper cable to the fixed antenna bracket. Avoid touching the negative cable clamp to the air conditioning line. Failure to do either of these could damage your vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty.
9. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while.
10-84 Vehicle Care
10. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Unpainted Metal Part or Remote Negative (-) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative (-) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its original position.
Vehicle Care 10-85
Towing
Towing the Vehicle
Notice: To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground. Care must be taken with vehicles that have low ground clearance and/or special equipment. Always flatbed on a car carrier.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 136.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes, such as behind a motor home, see "Recreational Vehicle Towing" in this section.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motor home. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly.
Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing:
. What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's recommendations.
. What is the distance that will be travelled? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
. Is the proper towing equipment going to be used? See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations.
. Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed.
10-86 Vehicle Care
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain components could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed.
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground. To properly tow these vehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle with any of its wheels on the ground.
Dolly Towing Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground) Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to tow the vehicle from the rear: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
Vehicle Care 10-87
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 932 for more information.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer's instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for six weeks or more, remove the battery cable from the negative terminal (post) of the battery to prevent the battery from draining while towing.
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground) All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with two wheels on the ground. To properly tow these vehicles, they should be placed on a platform trailer with all four wheels off the ground.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle with any of its wheels on the ground.
10-88 Vehicle Care
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the vehicle's finish, wash it often and out of direct sunlight.
Notice: Do not use petroleum based, acidic, or abrasive cleaning agents as they can damage the vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic parts. If damage occurs, it would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. Follow all manufacturer directions regarding correct product usage, necessary safety precautions, and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product.
Notice: Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after, to remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Finish Care
Application of aftermarket clearcoat sealant/wax materials is not recommended. If painted surfaces are damaged, see your dealer to have the damage assessed and repaired. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Occasional hand waxing or mild polishing should be done to remove residue from the paint finish. See your dealer for approved cleaning products.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/ clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle.
To keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Vehicle Care 10-89
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Regularly clean bright metal parts with water or chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
For aluminum, never use auto or chrome polish, steam, or caustic soap to clean. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Lenses and Emblems
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth, and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under "Washing the Vehicle" later in this section.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean rubber blades using lint-free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Damage can be caused by extreme dusty conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, snow and ice.
Weatherstrips
Apply silicone grease on weatherstrips to make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112.
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to clean the tires.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle.
10-90 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Trim -- Aluminum or Chrome
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soap and water to clean the wheels. After rinsing thoroughly with clean water, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft, clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium, calcium, or sodium chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust. Always wash the chrome with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: To avoid surface damage, do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Use only approved cleaners. Also, never drive a vehicle with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Damage could occur and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Steering, Suspension, and Chassis Components
Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.
Body Component Lubrication
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and steel fuel door hinge unless the components are plastic. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Underbody Maintenance
Use plain water to flush dirt and debris from the vehicle's underbody. Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this. If not removed, rust and corrosion can develop.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Vehicle Care 10-91
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty.
Finish Damage
Quickly repair minor chips and scratches with touch-up materials available from your dealer to avoid corrosion. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted vehicle surfaces causing blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Interior Care
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, regularly clean the vehicle's interior. Immediately remove any soils. Note that newspapers or dark garments that can transfer color to home
furnishings can also permanently transfer color to the vehicle's interior.
Use a soft bristle brush to remove dust from knobs and crevices on the instrument cluster. Using a mild soap solution, immediately remove hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect repellant from all interior surfaces or permanent damage may result.
Your dealer may have products for cleaning the interior. Use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned to prevent permanent damage. To prevent overspray, apply all cleaners directly to the cleaning cloth. Cleaners should be removed quickly. Never allow cleaners to remain on the surface being cleaned for extended periods of time.
Cleaners may contain solvents that can become concentrated in the interior. Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label. While
cleaning the interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the doors and windows.
To prevent damage, do not clean the interior using the following cleaners or techniques:
. Never use a razor or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface.
. Never use a brush with stiff bristles.
. Never rub any surface aggressively or with excessive pressure.
. Do not use laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. For liquid cleaners, use approximately 20 drops per 3.78L (1 gal) of water. A concentrated soap solution will leave a residue that creates streaks and attracts dirt. Do not use solutions that contain strong or caustic soap.
10-92 Vehicle Care
. Do not heavily saturate the upholstery when cleaning.
. Do not use solvents or cleaners containing solvents.
Interior Glass
To clean, use a terry cloth fabric dampened with water. Wipe droplets left behind with a clean dry cloth. Commercial glass cleaners may be used, if necessary, after cleaning the interior glass with plain water.
Notice: To prevent scratching, never use abrasive cleaners on automotive glass. Abrasive cleaners or aggressive cleaning may damage the rear window defogger.
Fabric/Carpet
Start by vacuuming the surface using a soft brush attachment. If a rotating brush attachment is being used during vacuuming, only use it on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques:
. Gently blot liquids with a paper towel. Continue blotting until no more soil can be removed.
. For solid soils, remove as much as possible prior to vacuuming.
To clean:
1. Saturate a clean lint-free colorfast cloth with water or club soda. Microfiber cloth is recommended to prevent lint transfer to the fabric or carpet.
2. Remove excess moisture by gently wringing until water does not drip from the cleaning cloth.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Rotate the cleaning cloth to a clean area frequently to prevent forcing the soil in to the fabric.
4. Continue gently rubbing the soiled area until there is no longer any color transfer from the soil to the cleaning cloth.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution followed only by club soda or plain water.
If the soil is not completely removed, it may be necessary to use a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small hidden area for colorfastness before using a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. If ring formation occurs, clean the entire fabric or carpet.
Following the cleaning process, a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture.
Vehicle Care 10-93
Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces
Use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For a more thorough cleaning, use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with a mild soap solution.
Notice: Soaking or saturating leather, especially perforated leather, as well as other interior surfaces, may cause permanent damage. Wipe excess moisture from these surfaces after cleaning and allow them to dry naturally. Never use heat, steam, spot lifters or spot removers. Do not use cleaners that contain silicone or wax-based products. Cleaners containing these solvents can permanently change the appearance and feel of leather or soft trim and are not recommended.
Do not use cleaners that increase gloss, especially on the instrument panel. Reflected glare can decrease visibility through the windshield under certain conditions.
Notice: Use of air fresheners may cause permanent damage to plastics and painted surfaces. If an air freshener comes in contact with any plastic or painted surface in the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Damage caused by air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
10-94 Vehicle Care
Floor Mats
{ WARNING
If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the pedals. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals.
Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat usage.
. The original equipment floor mats were designed for the vehicle. If the floor mats need replacing, it is recommended that GM certified floor mats be purchased. Non-GM floor mats may not fit properly and may interfere with the pedals. Always check that the floor mats do not interfere with the pedals.
. Use the floor mat with the correct side up. Do not turn it over.
. Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on top of another.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and Maintenance
General Information General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3
Special Application Services Special Application Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Additional Maintenance and Care
Additional Maintenance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Maintenance Records Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15
General Information
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. For diesel engine vehicles, see the maintenance schedule section in the Duramax Diesel Supplement.
Your vehicle is an important investment. This section describes the required maintenance for the vehicle. Follow this schedule to help protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance. It may also help to maintain the value of the vehicle if it is sold. It is the responsibility of the owner to have all required maintenance performed.
Your dealer has trained technicians who can perform required maintenance using genuine replacement parts. They have up-to-date tools and equipment for fast and accurate diagnostics. Many dealers have extended evening and Saturday hours, courtesy
transportation, and online scheduling to assist with service needs.
Your dealer recognizes the importance of providing competitively priced maintenance and repair services. With trained technicians, the dealer is the place for routine maintenance such as oil changes and tire rotations and additional maintenance items like tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper blades.
Notice: Damage caused by improper maintenance can lead to costly repairs and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are important to keep the vehicle in good working condition.
The Tire Rotation and Required Services are the responsibility of the vehicle owner. It is recommended to have your dealer perform these services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces vehicle emissions.
Because of the way people use vehicles, maintenance needs vary. There may need to be more frequent checks and services. The Additional Required Services - Normal are for vehicles that:
. Carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 910.
. Are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.
. Use the recommended fuel. See Recommended Fuel on page 938.
Refer to the information in the Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Normal chart.
The Additional Required Services - Severe are for vehicles that are:
. Mainly driven in hilly or mountainous terrain.
. Frequently towing a trailer.
. Used for high speed or competitive driving.
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery service.
Refer to the information in the Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Severe chart.
{ WARNING
Performing maintenance work can be dangerous and can cause serious injury. Perform maintenance work only if the required information, proper tools, and equipment are available. If they are not, see your dealer to have a trained technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 104.
Service and Maintenance 11-3
Maintenance Schedule
Owner Checks and Services
At Each Fuel Stop
. Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil on page 107.
Once a Month
. Check the tire inflation pressures. See Tire Pressure on page 1054.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See Tire Inspection on page 1060.
. Check the windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid on page 1024.
Engine Oil Change
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays, have the engine oil and filter changed within the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven under the best conditions, the engine oil life system might not indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your trained dealer technician can perform this work. If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the last service. Reset the oil life system when the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on page 109.
Tire Rotation and Required Services Every 12 000 km/ 7,500 mi
Rotate the tires, if recommended for the vehicle, and perform the following services. See Tire Rotation on page 1060.
. Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. If needed, change engine oil and filter, and reset oil life system. See Engine Oil on page 107 and Engine Oil Life System on page 109.
. Check engine coolant level. See Engine Coolant on page 1018.
. Check windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid on page 1024.
11-4 Service and Maintenance
. Visually inspect windshield wiper blades for wear, cracking, or contamination. See Exterior Care on page 1088. Replace worn or damaged wiper blades. See Wiper Blade Replacement on page 1032.
. Check tire inflation pressures. See Tire Pressure on page 1054.
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire Inspection on page 1060.
. Visually check for fluid leaks.
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 1016.
. Inspect brake system.
. Visually inspect steering, suspension, and chassis components for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear. See Exterior Care on page 1088.
. Check restraint system components. See Safety System Check on page 316.
. Visually inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
. Visually inspect exhaust system and nearby heat shields for loose or damaged parts.
. Lubricate body components. See Exterior Care on page 1088.
. Check starter switch. See Starter Switch Check on page 1031.
. Check automatic transmission shift lock control function. See Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check on page 1031.
. Check ignition transmission lock. See Ignition Transmission Lock Check on page 1032.
. Check parking brake and automatic transmission park mechanism. See Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check on page 1032.
. Check accelerator pedal for damage, high effort, or binding. Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage. Check the hold open ability of the strut. See your dealer if service is required.
Service and Maintenance 11-5
11-6 Service and Maintenance
Footnotes -- Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services -- Normal
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition. Check that the purge valve, if the vehicle has one, works properly. Replace as needed.
b) Or every four years, whichever comes first.
c) Do not directly power wash the transfer case output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced.
d) Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System on page 1017.
e) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying, excessive cracking, or damage; replace, if needed.
Service and Maintenance 11-7
11-8 Service and Maintenance
Footnotes -- Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services -- Severe
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition. Check that the purge valve, if the vehicle has one, works properly. Replace as needed.
b) Or every four years, whichever comes first.
c) Do not directly power wash the transfer case output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced.
d) Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System on page 1017.
e) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying, excessive cracking, or damage; replace, if needed.
Special Application Services
. Vehicles with Dual Wheels: Check dual wheel nut torque at 160 km/100 mi, 1 600 km/ 1,000 mi and 9 700 km/6,000 mi.
. Severe Commercial Use Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis components every 5 000 km/ 3,000 mi.
. Have underbody flushing service performed once a year.
Additional Maintenance and Care
Your vehicle is an important investment and caring for it properly may help to avoid future costly repairs. To maintain vehicle performance, additional maintenance services may be required. It is recommended that your dealer perform these services -- their trained dealer technicians know your vehicle best. Your dealer can also perform a thorough assessment with a multi-point inspection to recommend when your vehicle may need attention. The following list is intended to explain the services and conditions to look for that may indicate services are required.
Service and Maintenance 11-9
Battery
The battery supplies power to start the engine and operate any additional electrical accessories.
. To avoid break-down or failure to start the vehicle, maintain a battery with full cranking power.
. Trained dealer technicians have the diagnostic equipment to test the battery and ensure that the connections and cables are corrosion-free.
Belts
. Belts may need replacing if they squeak or show signs of cracking or splitting.
. Trained dealer technicians can inspect the belts and recommend replacement when necessary.
Brakes
Brakes stop the vehicle and are crucial to safe driving.
. Signs of brake wear may include chirping, grinding, or squealing noises, or difficulty stopping.
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment to inspect the brakes and recommend quality parts engineered for the vehicle.
Fluids
Proper fluid levels and approved fluids protect the vehicle's systems and components. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112 for GM approved fluids.
. Engine oil and windshield washer fluid levels should be checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may come on to indicate that fluids may be low and need to be filled.
Hoses
Hoses transport fluids and should be regularly inspected to ensure that there are no cracks or leaks. With a multi-point inspection, your dealer can inspect the hoses and advise if replacement is needed.
Lamps
Properly working headlamps, taillamps, and brake lamps are important to see and be seen on the road.
. Signs that the headlamps need attention include dimming, failure to light, cracking, or damage. The brake lamps need to be checked periodically to ensure that they light when braking.
. With a multi-point inspection, your dealer can check the lamps and note any concerns.
11-10 Service and Maintenance
Shocks and Struts
Shocks and struts help aid in control for a smoother ride.
. Signs of wear may include steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longer stopping distance, or uneven tire wear.
. As part of the multi-point inspection, trained dealer technicians can visually inspect the shocks and struts for signs of leaking, blown seals, or damage, and can advise when service is needed.
Tires
Tires need to be properly inflated, rotated, and balanced. Maintaining the tires can save money, fuel, and can reduce the risk of tire failure.
. Signs that the tires need to be replaced include three or more visible treadwear indicators; cord or fabric showing through the rubber; cracks or cuts in the tread or sidewall; or a bulge or split in the tire.
. Trained dealer technicians can inspect and recommend the right tires. Your dealer can also provide tire/wheel balancing services to ensure smooth vehicle operation at all speeds. Your dealer sells and services name brand tires.
Vehicle Care
To help keep the vehicle looking like new, vehicle care products are available from your dealer. For information on how to clean and protect the vehicle's interior and exterior, see Interior Care on page 1091 and Exterior Care on page 1088.
Wheel Alignment
Wheel alignment is critical for ensuring that the tires deliver optimal wear and performance.
. Signs that the alignment may need to be adjusted include pulling, improper vehicle handling, or unusual tire wear.
. Your dealer has the required equipment to ensure proper wheel alignment.
Service and Maintenance 11-11
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the best viewing, keep the windshield clean and clear.
. Signs of damage include scratches, cracks, and chips.
. Trained dealer technicians can inspect the windshield and recommend proper replacement if needed.
Wiper Blades
Wiper blades need to be cleaned and kept in good condition to provide a clear view.
. Signs of wear include streaking, skipping across the windshield, and worn or split rubber.
. Trained dealer technicians can check the wiper blades and replace them when needed.
11-12 Service and Maintenance
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the maintenance schedule section in the Duramax Diesel Supplement.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. See Engine Oil on page 107.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 1018.
Hydraulic Brake System Windshield Washer
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, in Canada 89021320).
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Parking Brake Cable Guides
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering System Automatic Transmission
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186). DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in Canada 10953474).
Service and Maintenance 11-13
Usage Chassis Lubrication
Front Wheel Bearings
Front and Rear Axle Transfer Case
One-Piece Propshaft Slip Yoke Spline, Two-Piece Propshaft Slip-in-Tube Spline Hood Hinges
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Weatherstrip Squeaks
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category GC or GC-LB (GM Part No. 1051344, in Canada 993037).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, in Canada 89021678). DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345879, in Canada 10953511).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, in Canada 10953437).
11-14 Service and Maintenance
Maintenance Replacement Parts
If the vehicle has the Duramax® diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
15950115
A3097C
Engine Oil Filter
4.3L V6
25010792
PF47
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8
89017524
PF48
Spark Plugs
4.3L V6
12568387
41-101
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8
12621258
41-110
Wiper Blades 56.0 cm (22 in)
25949887
--
Service and Maintenance 11-15
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Date
Odometer Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
11-16 Service and Maintenance
Date
Odometer Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Date
Odometer Reading
Serviced By
Service and Maintenance 11-17
Services Performed
11-18 Service and Maintenance
Date
Odometer Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data
Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the left side of the vehicle. It can be seen through the windshield from outside. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See "Engine Specifications" under Capacities and Specifications on page 122 for the vehicle's engine code.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label, on the rear edge of the passenger side front door, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
. Paint information.
. Production options and special equipment.
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 1112 for more information.
Application
Metric
Capacities English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System without Rear Heat
4.3L V6
9.5 L
10.0 qt
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8
11.8 L
12.4 qt
6.0L V8
13.1 L
13.8 qt
Cooling System with Rear Heat
4.3L V6
12.3 L
13.0 qt
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8
14.6 L
15.4 qt
6.0L V8
16.1 L
17.0 qt
Technical Data 12-3
Application
Metric
Capacities English
Engine Oil with Filter
4.3L V6
4.3 L
4.5 qt
4.8L V8, 5.3L V8, 6.0L V8
5.7 L
6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
Cutaway (Optional Tank)*
215.7 L
57.0 gal
Cutaway (Standard Tank)
124.9 L
33.0 gal
Passenger and Cargo
117.3 L
31.0 gal
* 4 039 mm (159 inch) wheelbase or 4 496 mm (177 inch) wheelbase only
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
4-SPD 4L60-E
4.7 L
5.0 qt
6-SPD 6L90
6.0 L
6.3 qt
Transfer Case Fluid
1.4 L
1.5 qt
Wheel Nut Torque
190 Y
140 ft lb
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
12-4 Technical Data
4.3L V6 4.8L V8 5.3L V8 6.0L V8
Engine
Engine Specifications
VIN Code
Transmission
X
Automatic
A
Automatic
4
Automatic
G
Automatic
Engine Drive Belt Routing
Spark Plug Gap 1.52 mm (0.060 in) 1.02 mm (0.040 in) 1.02 mm (0.040 in) 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
V6 Engines
V8 Engines
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Information
Customer Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9 Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16 Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by your dealer's sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, contact the owner of your dealership or the general manager.
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by your dealership without further help, in the U.S., call 1-800-462-8782, Customer Assistance prompt. In Canada, call General Motors of Canada Customer Care Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance representative:
. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.
. Dealership name and location.
. Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting GMC, remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility. That is why we suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE -- U.S. Owners: Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with the new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filling out a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
Customer Information 13-3
STEP THREE -- Canadian Owners: In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors Customer Care Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program c/o Customer Care Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Customer Assistance Offices
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or e-mail GMC, the letter should be addressed to:
United States
GMC Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33172 Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.GMC.com
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782) 1-800-462-8583 (For Text Telephone Devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-888-881-3302
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English) 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Front U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
13-4 Customer Information
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 www.gmc.ca
1-800-263-3777 (English) 1-800-263-7854 (French) 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone Devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. Customer Assistance Center Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 Col. Granada C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-466-0801 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0801
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with GMC by dialing: 1-800-462-8583. TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Online Owner Center
GMC Owner Center (U.S.) www.gmcownercenter.com
Information and services customized for your specific vehicle -- all in one convenient place.
. Digital owner manual, warranty information, and more.
. Storage for online service and maintenance records.
. GMC dealer locator for service nationwide.
. Exclusive privileges and offers.
. Recall notices for your specific vehicle.
. OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries.
Customer Information 13-5
Other Helpful Links
GMC -- www.gmc.com
GMC Merchandise -- www.gmccollection.com
Help Center -- www.gmc.com/ helpcenter
. FAQ (Frequently Asked Questions)
. Contact Us
My GM Canada www.gm.ca
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to:
. My Showroom: Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area.
. My Dealers: Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers.
. My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and service estimates, check trade-in values, or schedule a service appointment by adding the vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
. My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca section within www.gm.ca.
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program
This program is available to qualified applicants for cost reimbursement of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for the vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/ scooter lift for the vehicle. For more information on the limited offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text Telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
13-6 Customer Information
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call 1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
For Canadian-purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following information ready:
. Your name, home address, and home telephone number.
. Telephone number of your location.
. Location of the vehicle.
. Model, year, color, and license plate number of the vehicle.
. Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.
. Description of the problem.
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification.
GMC and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the same type of claim is made many times.
Services Provided
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
. Lock-Out Service: Service to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar®. For security reasons, the driver must present identification before this service is given.
. Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway: Tow to the nearest GMC dealer for warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
Customer Information 13-7
. Flat Tire Change: Service to change a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped, must be in good condition and properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to jump start a dead battery.
. Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North America when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route. Additional travel information is also available. Allow three weeks for delivery.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi) Powertrain warranty period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and rental car.
Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance
. Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
. Legal fines.
. Mounting, dismounting, or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
. Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non-public road or highway.
Services Specific to Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement is approximately $5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service.
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
. Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited requires pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair orders. Once authorization has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor will help to make arrangements and explain how to receive payment.
. Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be provided right away, the Roadside Assistance advisor may give permission to get local emergency road service. You will receive payment, up to $100, after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be covered, however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility.
13-8 Customer Information
Scheduling Service Appointments
When the vehicle requires warranty service, contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising the service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety related. If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If your dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same-day repair.
Courtesy Transportation Program
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada), extended powertrain, and/or hybrid-specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.
The Courtesy Transportation program is no longer available for cutaway vehicles.
Several Courtesy Transportation options are available to assist in reducing inconvenience when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled "Warranty and Owner Assistance Information" furnished
with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to minimize inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can offer one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round-trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of your dealer's area.
Customer Information 13-9
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If the vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and public transportation is used instead of your dealer's shuttle service, the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if the vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty repair.
Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be supported by original receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If the vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish the vehicle resale value, and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions.
13-10 Customer Information
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which the vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are the best choice to ensure that the vehicle's designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain the vehicle's originally designed appearance and safety performance; however, the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not covered by the GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for the vehicle. As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/ corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts is not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs. Your dealer may have a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and state-of-the-art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable equipment.
Insuring the Vehicle
Protect your investment in the GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to the GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you ensure that the vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Customer Information 13-11
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing company may require you to have insurance that ensures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read the lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of the lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call emergency services for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of. Move the vehicle only if its position puts you in danger, or you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
Give only the necessary information to police and other parties involved in the crash.
For emergency towing see Roadside Assistance Program on page 136.
Gather the following information:
. Driver name, address, and telephone number.
. Driver license number.
. Owner name, address, and telephone number.
. Vehicle license plate number.
. Vehicle make, model, and model year.
. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
. Insurance company and policy number.
. General description of the damage to the other vehicle.
Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality replacement parts. See "Collision Parts" earlier in this section.
If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? on page 323.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process
In the event that the vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take the vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by the GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with the repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember, if the vehicle is leased, you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
13-12 Customer Information
If another party's insurance company is paying for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company's collision policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that company. In such cases, you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as the cost stays within reasonable limits.
Service Publications Ordering Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on the engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of the vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The Owner Manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and shipping fees.
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and shipping fees.
Current and Past Models
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Or write to:
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Make checks payable in U.S. funds.
Customer Information 13-13
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that the vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, and notify General Motors of Canada Limited. Call Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 80 rue Noel Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
13-14 Customer Information
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782), or write:
GMC Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33172 Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
This GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle's performance and how it is driven. For example, the vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash, and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help your dealer technician service the vehicle. Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may also retain the owner's personal preferences, such as radio presets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
. How various systems in the vehicle were operating.
. Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened.
. How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Customer Information 13-15
This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by the vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request by police or similar government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation through the discovery process; or, as required by law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar®
If the vehicle is equipped with an active OnStar system, that system may also record data in crash or near crash-like situations. The OnStar Terms and Conditions provides information on data collection and use and is available at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
pressing the Q button and
speaking to an advisor. See OnStar Overview on page 141 for more information.
13-16 Customer Information
Navigation System
If the vehicle has a navigation system, use of the system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. Refer to the navigation manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions.
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security, as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door
locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information.
Radio Frequency Statement
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
OnStar 14-1
OnStar
OnStar Overview OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
OnStar Services Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
OnStar Additional Information OnStar Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
OnStar Overview
If equipped, this vehicle has a comprehensive, in-vehicle system that can connect to a live Advisor for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Connection, and Diagnostic Services. The OnStar system status light is next to the OnStar buttons. If the status light is: . Solid Green: System is ready. . Flashing Green: On a call. . Red: Indicates a problem.
Push Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an Advisor.
Push X to:
. Make a call, end a call, or answer an incoming call.
. Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling voice commands.
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice commands. Requires the available Directions and Connections service plan.
Push Q to connect to a live
Advisor to:
. Verify account information or update contact information.
. Get driving directions. Requires the available Directions and Connections service plan.
. Receive On-Demand Diagnostics for a check on the vehicle's key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
14-2 OnStar
Push ] to get a priority connection
to an Emergency Advisor available 24/7 to:
. Get help for an emergency.
. Be a Good Samaritan or respond to an AMBER Alert.
. Get crisis assistance and evacuation routes.
OnStar Services
Emergency
With Automatic Crash Response, the built-in system can automatically connect to help in a crash even if you cannot ask for it.
Push ] to connect to an
Emergency Advisor. GPS technology is used to identify the vehicle location and can provide critical information to emergency personnel. The Advisor is also trained to offer critical assistance in emergency situations.
Security
OnStar provides services like Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition Block, and Roadside Assistance, if the vehicle is equipped with these services. OnStar can unlock the vehicle doors remotely, if it is equipped with automatic door locks, and can help police locate the vehicle if it is stolen.
Navigation
OnStar navigation requires the Directions and Connections service plan.
Push Q to receive directions or
have them sent to the vehicle navigation screen. Destinations can also be forwarded to the vehicle from Google MapsTM or MapQuest.com. The OnStar mapping database is continuously updated. Visit www.onstar.com for coverage maps.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation
1. Push Q to connect to a live
Advisor.
2. Request directions.
3. Directions are downloaded to the vehicle.
4. Follow the voice-guided commands.
Using Voice Commands During a Planned Route
Cancel Route
1. Push X. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone. Say "Cancel route." System responds: "Would you like to cancel route directions to your destination?"
2. Say "Yes." System responds: "OK, route canceled."
3. Say "Goodbye." Exits voice commands.
Route Preview
1. Push X. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Route Preview." System responds with the next three maneuvers.
3. Say "Goodbye." Exits voice commands.
OnStar 14-3
Repeat
1. Push X. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Repeat." System responds with the last direction given, then responds with "OnStar ready," then a tone.
3. Say "Goodbye." Exits voice commands.
Get My Destination
1. Push X. System responds:
"OnStar ready," then a tone.
2. Say "Get my destination." System responds with miles to the destination, then responds with "OnStar ready," then a tone.
3. Say "Goodbye." Exits voice commands.
Other Navigation Services Available from OnStar
OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers to send destinations from Google MapsTM and MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
screen-based navigation system. When ready, the directions will be downloaded to the vehicle.
Destination Download: Push Q,
then request the Advisor to download directions to the navigation system in the vehicle. After the call ends, push the "Go" button on the navigation screen to begin driving directions.
Destinations can also be downloaded on the go. For information about eNav, Destination Download, and coverage maps visit www.onstar.com.
Connections
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows calls to be made and received from the vehicle. The vehicle can also be controlled from a cell phone through the OnStar mobile app. See www.onstar.com for coverage maps.
14-4 OnStar
Hands-Free Calling
1. Push X. System responds:
"OnStar ready."
2. Say "Dial." System responds: "Please say the name or number to call."
3. Say the entire number without pausing, including a "1" and the area code. System responds: "OK calling."
Retrieve My Number
1. Push X. System responds:
"OnStar ready."
2. Say "My Number." System responds: "Your OnStar Hands-Free Calling number is."
End a Call
Push X. System responds: "Call
ended."
Store a Name Tag for Speed Dialing
1. Push X. System responds:
"OnStar ready."
2. Say "Store." System responds: "Please say the number you would like to store."
3. Say the entire number without pausing. System responds: "Please say the name tag."
4. Pick a name tag. "System responds: "About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?"
5. Say "Yes" or "No" to try again. System responds: "OK, storing <name tag>."
Place a Call Using a Stored Number
1. Push X. System responds:
"OnStar ready."
2. Say "Call <name tag>." System responds: "OK, calling <name tag>."
Verify Minutes and Expiration
Push X and say "minutes" then
"verify" to check how many minutes remain and their expiration date.
OnStar Mobile App
With an iPhone® or AndroidTM-based mobile device, an OnStar mobile app can be downloaded. The vehicle can be remote started, if equipped, or the doors can be unlocked from anywhere there is cell phone service. It can also check the fuel level, tire pressure, and oil life. It can connect to an OnStar Advisor anytime. For OnStar mobile app compatibility or further information, see www.onstar.com.
Diagnostics
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will perform a vehicle check every month. It will check the engine, transmission, antilock brakes, and major vehicle systems. It also checks the tire pressures, if the vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. If a diagnostics check is needed
between e-mails, push Q, and an
Advisor can run a check.
OnStar 14-5
OnStar Additional Information
Transferring Service
Push Q to request account transfer
eligibility information. The Advisor can assist in canceling or removing account information. If OnStar receives information that vehicle ownership has changed, OnStar may send a voice message to the vehicle, requesting updated account information.
Reactivation for Subsequent Owners
Push Q and follow the prompts to
speak to an Advisor as soon as possible after acquiring the vehicle. The Advisor will update vehicle records and will explain the OnStar service offers and options available.
How OnStar Service Works
Automatic Crash Response, Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are available everywhere or on all vehicles. For more information, a full description of OnStar services, system limitations, and OnStar terms and conditions, see www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080; or push Q to
speak with an Advisor. OnStar services require a vehicle electrical system, wireless service, and GPS satellite technologies to be available and operating for features to function properly. These systems may not operate if the battery is discharged or disconnected.
14-6 OnStar
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area, and the wireless service provider has coverage, network capacity, reception, and technology compatible with OnStar's service. Service involving location information about the vehicle cannot work unless GPS signals are available, unobstructed, and compatible with the OnStar hardware. OnStar service may not work if the OnStar equipment is not properly installed or it has not been properly maintained. If equipment or software is added, connected, or modified, OnStar service may not work. Other problems beyond OnStar's control may prevent service such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather, electrical system design and architecture of the vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone network congestion or jamming.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 1316 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Services for People with Disabilities
Advisors provide services to help subscribers with physical disabilities and medical conditions.
Push Q for help with:
. Locating a gas station with an attendant to pump gas.
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., that meets accessibility needs.
. Providing directions to the closest hospital or pharmacy in urgent situations.
TTY Users
OnStar has the ability to communicate to the deaf, hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired customers while in the vehicle. The available dealer-installed TTY system can provide in-vehicle access to all of the OnStar services, except Virtual Advisor and OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
Onstar.com
The website provides access to account information, manages the OnStar subscription, and allows viewing of videos of each service. Get subscription plan pricing and sign up for OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics. Click on the "My Account" tab on the home page.
OnStar 14-7
OnStar Personal Identification Number (PIN)
A PIN is needed to access some of the OnStar services, like Remote Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle Assistance. You will be prompted to change the PIN the first time when speaking with an Advisor. To change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar and provide the Advisor with the current number.
Warranty
OnStar equipment may be warranted as part of the new-vehicle limited warranty. The manufacturer of the vehicle furnishes detailed warranty information.
Languages
The vehicle can be programmed to respond in French or Spanish.
Push Q and ask an Advisor.
Advisors can speak French or Spanish.
Potential Issues
Some OnStar services are disabled after five days. OnStar cannot perform Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the vehicle has been off continuously for five days. After five days, OnStar can contact Roadside Assistance and a locksmith to help gain access to the vehicle.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
. Obstruction of the GPS can occur in a large city with tall buildings; in parking garages; around airports; in tunnels, underpasses, or parking garages; or in an area with very dense trees. If GPS signals are not available, the OnStar system should still operate to call OnStar. However, OnStar could have difficulty identifying the exact location.
. In emergency situations, OnStar can use the last stored GPS location to send to emergency responders.
. A temporary loss of GPS can cause loss of the ability to send a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The Advisor may give a verbal route or may ask for a call back after the vehicle is driven into an open area.
Cellular and GPS Antennas
Avoid placing items over or near the antenna to prevent blocking cellular and GPS signal reception. Cellular reception is required for OnStar to send remote signals to the vehicle.
14-8 OnStar
Unable to Connect to OnStar Message
If there is limited cellular coverage or the cellular network has reached maximum capacity, this message
may come on. Push Q to try the
call again or try again after driving a few miles into another cellular area.
Vehicle and Power Issues
OnStar services require a vehicle electrical system, wireless service, and GPS satellite technologies to be available and operating for features to function properly. These systems may not operate if the battery is discharged or disconnected.
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The OnStar system is integrated into the electrical architecture of the vehicle. Do not add any electrical equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment on page 955. Added electrical equipment may interfere with the operation of the OnStar system and cause it to not operate.
Privacy
The complete OnStar Privacy Statement may be found at www.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitive users of wireless communications are cautioned that the privacy of any information sent via wireless cellular communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept or access transmissions and private communications without consent.
INDEX i-1
A
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 Additional Information,
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Airbag
Adding Equipment to the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Airbag System (cont'd) What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-19
Airbags On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-19 Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Servicing Airbag-Equipped Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 9-31, 10-28 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Anti-theft
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-38 Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Appearance Care Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Assistance Program,
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12 Audio System
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-3 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23, 9-27 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10, 10-13 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Shift Lock Control
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
i-2 INDEX
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Voltage and Charging Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-32 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-23 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-37 Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Bulb Replacement (cont'd) Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-38 Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Carbon Monoxide Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Cautions, Danger, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-20 Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Ignition
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-32 Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-43
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-49, 3-51, 3-54 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39 Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Cleaning Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91 Climate Control System Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
INDEX i-3
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9 Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14 Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Door
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Drive Systems All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-31, 10-28
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-20 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
i-4 INDEX
E
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40 Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 Electrical System
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Floor Console Fuse Block . . 10-44 Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Cooling System Messages . . .5-34 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Engine (cont'd) Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-23 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Enhanced Technology Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
F
Fan Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Filter,
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94 Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 10-10, 10-13
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Front Seats Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Front Turn Signal Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-40 Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-39 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-38 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
INDEX i-5
Fuel (cont'd) Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38 Requirements, California . . . . .9-39 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Fuel Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Floor Console Fuse Block . . 10-44 Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
G
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Gauges Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Gauges (cont'd) Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Warning Lights and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
General Information Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Glass, Enhanced Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
H
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-27 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
I
Idle System Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
i-6 INDEX
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-36 Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-47 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Lamps
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-20 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 LATCH System
Replacing Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
LATCH, Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Light StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Lighting
Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Lights Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-23 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Lights (cont'd) High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35 Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Cargo Door Relocking . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
INDEX i-7
M
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Maintenance Schedule Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-20 Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-38 Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-34 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-37 Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Messages (cont'd) Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Mirrors Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Monitor System, Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
N
Navigation Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Navigation, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-30
O
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Oil Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-35 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 OnStar®
Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5 Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Operation, Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
i-8 INDEX
Ordering Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-12
Outlets Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
P
Park Shifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-32 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-22
Parking Lamps Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-28 Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Personalization Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Phone Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Privacy Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16
Program Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8
Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
R
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Radios AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35 Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-5 Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Rear Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Recommended
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38 Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
INDEX i-9
Records Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-34 Replacing LATCH System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-16 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Restraints Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Ride Control Systems Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Roads Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4 Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
S
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-16 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15
Safety Defects Reporting Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8 Seats
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-78 Securing Child Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-49, 3-51, 3-54 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Security, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
i-10 INDEX
Service Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15 Maintenance, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Shift Lock Control Function
Check, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Sidemarker Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 StabiliTrak
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Storage Areas Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Switches Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv System Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
T
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-11
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-56 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-55 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Secondary Latch System . . . 10-78 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
INDEX i-11
Tires (cont'd) Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-66 When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-43 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-85 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85 Traction Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Trailer
Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23, 9-27 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . 10-10, 10-13 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
V
Vehicle Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Vehicle Care Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Vehicle Identification Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
W
Warning Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-41
i-12 INDEX
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Enhanced Technology Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Swing-out Windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-32
Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode